BioStar 1.61 Administrator Guide

BioStar 1.61 Administrator Guide
BioStar 1.61
Administrator Guide
Table of Contents
1. About the BioStar System ....................................................................... 1
1.1 Logical Configuration .......................................................................................... 4
1.2 Access Control Features ..................................................................................... 5
1.2.1
User Authentication .................................................................................................. 5
1.2.2
User Management .................................................................................................... 7
1.2.3
Access Group Management ................................................................................... 7
1.2.4
Device Management ................................................................................................ 7
1.2.5
Door and Elevator (Lift) Management ................................................................... 8
1.2.6
Zone Management .................................................................................................... 8
1.2.7
Time and Attendance ............................................................................................... 8
1.2.8
IP Camera and NVR Server Management ............................................................ 9
2. Install the BioStar Software .................................................................. 10
2.1 System Requirements ....................................................................................... 10
2.2 Run the BioStar Express Installer ..................................................................... 11
2.3 Install the BioStar Server Application .............................................................. 12
2.3.1
Configure the MySQL Database ...........................................................................14
2.3.2
Configure the BioStar Server ................................................................................14
2.4 Install the BioStar Client Application ............................................................... 15
2.4.1
Log in to BioStar for the First Time ......................................................................16
2.5 Customize the BioStar Interface ....................................................................... 17
2.5.1
Change the Theme ..................................................................................................17
2.5.2
Customize the Toolbar............................................................................................18
2.5.3
Change Event Views ...............................................................................................19
2.6 Migrate a Database from BioAdmin to BioStar ............................................... 19
3. Setup the BioStar System ..................................................................... 20
3.1 Create Administrative Accounts ....................................................................... 20
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
i
Table of Contents
3.1.1
Administrative Levels .............................................................................................20
3.1.2
Add and Customize Administrative Accounts ...................................................21
3.1.2.1
Add an administrative account ............................................................................... 22
3.1.2.2
Change an administrative account level or password ........................................ 22
3.1.2.3
Create a custom administration level .................................................................... 23
3.2 Setup Devices ................................................................................................... 25
3.2.1
Search for and Add Devices .................................................................................25
3.2.2
Search for and Add Slave Devices ......................................................................27
3.2.3
Add an RF Device ....................................................................................................28
3.2.4
Configure a BioStation Device .............................................................................29
3.2.4.1
3.2.5
Connect a BioStation device via wireless LAN .................................................... 30
Configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Device ..............................................31
3.2.5.1
Issue command cards .............................................................................................. 33
3.2.6
Configure a BioLite Net Device ............................................................................34
3.2.7
Configure an Xpass or Xpass Slim Device .........................................................35
3.2.7.1
Issue command cards .............................................................................................. 36
3.2.8
Configure a D-Station Device ...............................................................................37
3.2.9
Configure an X-Station Device .............................................................................38
3.2.10 Configure a BioStation T2 Device ........................................................................39
3.2.11 Configure a FaceStation Device ...........................................................................41
3.2.12 Change Wiegand Formats .....................................................................................42
3.2.12.1
Configure a 26-bit Wiegand format ........................................................................ 43
3.2.12.2
Configure a pass-through Wiegand format .......................................................... 44
3.2.12.3
Configure a custom Wiegand format ..................................................................... 44
3.3 Setup Doors ...................................................................................................... 46
3.3.1
Add a Door................................................................................................................46
3.3.2
Associate a Device With a Door ..........................................................................46
3.3.3
Configure a Door .....................................................................................................47
3.3.4
Create a Door Group ...............................................................................................47
3.4 Setup Elevators (Lifts) ....................................................................................... 48
3.4.1
Add an Elevator .......................................................................................................48
3.4.2
Associate a Device With an Elevator ..................................................................48
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
ii
Table of Contents
3.4.3
Configure an Elevator .............................................................................................49
3.4.4
Add Users to an Elevator .......................................................................................49
3.4.5
Transfer Settings to an Elevator ...........................................................................50
3.5 Setup Zones ...................................................................................................... 51
3.5.1
Determine Which Zones to Use ...........................................................................51
3.5.2
Add and Configure Zones ......................................................................................52
3.5.2.1
Add a zone ................................................................................................................. 52
3.5.2.2
Add a device to a zone ............................................................................................. 53
3.5.2.3
Configure zone inputs............................................................................................... 54
3.5.2.4
Configure alarm actions and outputs ..................................................................... 54
3.5.2.5
Configure arm and disarm settings ........................................................................ 55
3.5.2.6
Configure external input/output settings ............................................................... 56
3.5.2.7
Select access groups............................................................................................... 58
3.5.2.8
View zone events ...................................................................................................... 58
3.6 Setup Users....................................................................................................... 58
3.6.1
Create a User Account...........................................................................................58
3.6.2
Register Fingerprints ..............................................................................................60
3.6.2.1
Place fingers on the sensor..................................................................................... 60
3.6.2.2
Register fingerprints ................................................................................................. 61
3.6.2.3
Enroll users via command cards ............................................................................ 62
3.6.3
Capture Face Images .............................................................................................63
3.6.4
Issue Access Cards ................................................................................................64
3.6.5
3.6.4.1
Issue EM4100 cards.................................................................................................. 65
3.6.4.2
Issue HID proximity cards........................................................................................ 66
3.6.4.3
Issue MIFARE or iCLASS CSN cards...................................................................... 67
3.6.4.4
Issue MIFARE or iCLASS template cards .............................................................. 68
3.6.4.5
Change the MIFARE or iCLASS site key ................................................................ 69
3.6.4.6
Edit the MIFARE layout ............................................................................................. 69
3.6.4.7
Edit the iCLASS layout .............................................................................................. 71
Transfer User Data .................................................................................................72
3.6.5.1
Transfer a user to a device...................................................................................... 72
3.6.5.2
Synchronize all users ............................................................................................... 73
3.6.5.3
Retrieve user data from a device............................................................................ 73
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
iii
Table of Contents
3.7 Setup Timezones............................................................................................... 74
3.7.1
Create a Timezone ..................................................................................................74
3.7.2
Create a Holiday Schedule ....................................................................................75
3.8 Setup Access Groups ........................................................................................ 76
3.8.1
Add an Access Group ............................................................................................76
3.8.2
Add Users to Access Groups ................................................................................77
3.8.3
Assign Access Groups to Users ...........................................................................77
3.8.4
Transfer Access Groups to Devices....................................................................78
3.9 Setup Time and Attendance ............................................................................. 79
3.9.1
Add a Time Category ..............................................................................................79
3.9.2
Add a Daily Schedule .............................................................................................80
3.9.3
Add a Shift ................................................................................................................82
3.9.4
Assign Users to Shifts ............................................................................................83
3.9.5
Add a Holiday Rule ..................................................................................................85
3.9.6
Add a Leave Period .................................................................................................86
3.10 Setup Alarms .................................................................................................... 87
3.10.1 Configure Alarm Settings and Sounds ................................................................87
3.10.1.1
Customize alarm actions .......................................................................................... 87
3.10.1.2
Add custom alarm sounds ....................................................................................... 88
3.10.2 Configure email notifications ................................................................................88
3.10.3 Configure Settings for External Devices .............................................................89
3.10.3.1
Configure outputs to external devices ................................................................... 89
3.10.3.2
Configure inputs from external devices................................................................. 91
3.11 Setup Cameras.................................................................................................. 92
3.11.1 Add an NVR Server .................................................................................................92
3.11.2 Add an IP Camera ...................................................................................................94
3.11.3 Configure an IP Camera .........................................................................................96
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
iv
Table of Contents
4. Manage the BioStar System ................................................................ 97
4.1 Monitor Events in Real Time ............................................................................ 97
4.1.1
Monitor Muster Zones in Real Time ....................................................................99
4.1.2
Monitor Areas with Cameras in Real Time ......................................................100
4.2 View Event Logs.............................................................................................. 100
4.2.1
Upload Logs to BioStar ........................................................................................101
4.2.2
View Logs in User, Door, and Zone Panes .......................................................101
4.2.3
View Logs from the Monitoring Pane ................................................................102
4.2.4
View Access Logs .................................................................................................103
4.3 Monitor Door Events via a Visual Map ........................................................... 104
4.3.1
Create a Visual Map .............................................................................................104
4.3.2
Monitor Doors on a Visual Map .........................................................................105
4.4 Control Doors, Alarms, and Devices Remotely ............................................... 107
4.4.1
Open or Close Doors.............................................................................................107
4.4.2
Release Alarms .....................................................................................................107
4.4.3
Lock or Unlock Devices .......................................................................................107
4.4.3.1
Lock or unlock connected devices....................................................................... 108
4.4.3.2
Set automatic device locking ................................................................................ 108
4.4.3.3
Reset a device lock................................................................................................. 109
4.5 Manage Users................................................................................................. 110
4.5.1
Delete Users ..........................................................................................................110
4.5.1.1
Delete an individual user via command cards.................................................... 110
4.5.1.2
Delete all users via command cards .................................................................... 111
4.5.2
Transfer Users to Other Departments ...............................................................111
4.5.3
Customize User Information Fields ....................................................................112
4.5.3.1
Add new information fields.................................................................................... 112
4.5.3.2
Modify existing information fields ........................................................................ 113
4.5.4
Export User Data ...................................................................................................113
4.5.5
Import User Data ...................................................................................................114
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
v
Table of Contents
4.6 Manage Time and Attendance ....................................................................... 115
4.6.1
Monitor T&A Status via the IO Board................................................................115
4.6.2
Generate T&A Reports .........................................................................................116
4.6.3
Modify T&A Reports .............................................................................................117
4.6.4
Print or Export T&A Report Data ........................................................................119
4.7 Manage Devices ............................................................................................. 120
4.7.1
Remove Devices ....................................................................................................120
4.7.2
Upgrade Device Firmware...................................................................................120
4.7.3
Downgrade Device Firmware .............................................................................121
4.8 Activate Fingerprint Encryption ...................................................................... 121
4.9 Change the Fingerprint Template ................................................................... 122
5. Customize Settings .............................................................................. 123
5.1 Customize Device Settings ............................................................................. 123
5.1.1
5.1.2
Customize Settings for BioStation Devices ......................................................123
5.1.1.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 124
5.1.1.2
Fingerprint tab ......................................................................................................... 126
5.1.1.3
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 128
5.1.1.4
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 129
5.1.1.5
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 130
5.1.1.6
Output tab................................................................................................................. 131
5.1.1.7
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 132
5.1.1.8
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 133
5.1.1.9
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 134
5.1.1.10
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 136
Customize Settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Devices ......................137
5.1.2.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 137
5.1.2.2
Fingerprint tab ......................................................................................................... 139
5.1.2.3
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 140
5.1.2.4
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 141
5.1.2.5
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 142
5.1.2.6
Output tab................................................................................................................. 143
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
vi
Table of Contents
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.2.7
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 144
5.1.2.8
Command Card tab ................................................................................................. 145
5.1.2.9
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 145
5.1.2.10
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 147
Customize Settings for BioLite Net Devices ....................................................148
5.1.3.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 148
5.1.3.2
Fingerprint tab ......................................................................................................... 150
5.1.3.3
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 151
5.1.3.4
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 152
5.1.3.5
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 153
5.1.3.6
Output tab................................................................................................................. 154
5.1.3.7
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 155
5.1.3.8
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 156
5.1.3.9
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 158
5.1.3.10
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 159
Customize Settings for Xpass Devices..............................................................160
5.1.4.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 160
5.1.4.2
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 162
5.1.4.3
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 163
5.1.4.4
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 164
5.1.4.5
Output tab................................................................................................................. 165
5.1.4.6
Command Card tab ................................................................................................. 167
5.1.4.7
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 167
5.1.4.8
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 169
Customize Settings for Xpass Slim Devices .....................................................170
5.1.5.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 170
5.1.5.2
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 171
5.1.5.3
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 172
5.1.5.4
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 173
5.1.5.5
Output tab................................................................................................................. 175
5.1.5.6
Command Card tab ................................................................................................. 176
5.1.5.7
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 177
5.1.5.8
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 178
Customize Settings for D-Station Devices .......................................................179
5.1.6.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 179
5.1.6.2
Fingerprint tab ......................................................................................................... 182
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
vii
Table of Contents
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.6.3
Camera tab............................................................................................................... 183
5.1.6.4
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 184
5.1.6.5
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 185
5.1.6.6
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 186
5.1.6.7
Output tab................................................................................................................. 187
5.1.6.8
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 188
5.1.6.9
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 188
5.1.6.10
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 190
5.1.6.11
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 192
Customize Settings for X-Station Devices ........................................................193
5.1.7.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 193
5.1.7.2
Camera tab............................................................................................................... 195
5.1.7.3
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 195
5.1.7.4
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 196
5.1.7.5
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 197
5.1.7.6
Output tab................................................................................................................. 198
5.1.7.7
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 199
5.1.7.8
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 200
5.1.7.9
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 201
5.1.7.10
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 203
Customize Settings for BioStation T2 Devices ................................................204
5.1.8.1
Operation Mode tab................................................................................................ 204
5.1.8.2
Fingerprint tab ......................................................................................................... 207
5.1.8.3
Camera tab............................................................................................................... 208
5.1.8.4
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 208
5.1.8.5
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 210
5.1.8.6
Interphone tab ......................................................................................................... 211
5.1.8.7
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 212
5.1.8.8
Output tab................................................................................................................. 213
5.1.8.9
Black List tab ........................................................................................................... 214
5.1.8.10
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 214
5.1.8.11
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 216
5.1.8.12
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 218
Customize Settings for FaceStation Devices ...................................................219
5.1.9.1 Operation Mode tab........................................................................................................ 219
5.1.9.2
Face tab .................................................................................................................... 222
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
viii
Table of Contents
5.1.9.3
Camera tab............................................................................................................... 222
5.1.9.4
Network tab ............................................................................................................. 223
5.1.9.5
Access Control tab ................................................................................................. 224
5.1.9.6
Interphone tab ......................................................................................................... 225
5.1.9.7
Input tab ................................................................................................................... 226
5.1.9.8
Output tab................................................................................................................. 227
5.1.9.9
Display/Sound tab ................................................................................................... 229
5.1.9.10
T&A tab..................................................................................................................... 230
5.1.9.11
Wiegand tab ............................................................................................................ 232
5.2 Customize Door Settings ................................................................................ 233
5.2.1
Details tab...............................................................................................................233
5.2.2
Alarm tab ................................................................................................................235
5.3 Customize Zone Settings ................................................................................ 236
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
Customize Settings for Anti-Passback Zones ..................................................236
5.3.1.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 236
5.3.1.2
Alarm tab .................................................................................................................. 237
5.3.1.3
Access Group tab ................................................................................................... 237
Customize Settings for Entrance Limit Zones ..................................................238
5.3.2.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 238
5.3.2.2
Alarm tab .................................................................................................................. 239
5.3.2.3
Access Group tab ................................................................................................... 239
Customize Settings for Alarm Zones .................................................................240
5.3.3.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 240
5.3.3.2
Alarm tab .................................................................................................................. 241
5.3.3.3
Access Group tab ................................................................................................... 241
Customize Settings for Fire Alarm Zones .........................................................242
5.3.4.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 242
5.3.4.2
Alarm tab .................................................................................................................. 242
Customize Settings for Access Zones...............................................................243
5.3.5.1
5.3.6
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 243
Customize Settings for Muster Zones ...............................................................244
5.3.6.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 244
5.3.6.2
Access Group tab ................................................................................................... 244
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
ix
Table of Contents
5.3.7
Customize Settings for Interlock Zones ............................................................245
5.3.7.1
Details tab ................................................................................................................ 245
5.4 Customize User Settings................................................................................. 246
5.4.1
Details Tab..............................................................................................................246
5.4.2
Fingerprints Tab ....................................................................................................247
5.4.3
Face Tab .................................................................................................................247
5.4.4
Face (Fusion) Tab ..................................................................................................248
5.4.5
Card Tab..................................................................................................................248
5.4.6
T&A Tab ..................................................................................................................249
6. Solve Problems .................................................................................... 250
Glossary...................................................................................................... 251
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
x
Warranty and Disclaimers
Suprema Warranty Policy
Suprema warrants to Buyer, subject to the limitations set forth below, that each product shall operate in
substantial accordance with the published specifications for such product for a period of one (1) year from
the date of shipment of products ("Warranty Period"). If Buyer notifies Suprema in writing within the
Warranty Period of any defects covered by this warranty, Suprema shall, at its option, repair or replace the
defective product that is returned to Suprema within the Warranty Period, with freight and insurance
prepaid by Buyer. Such repair or replacement shall be Suprema's exclusive remedy for breach of warranty
with respect to the Product. This limited warranty shall not extend to any product that has been: (i) subject
to unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse, neglect, accident or abuse, or damaged by any other
external causes; (ii) improperly repaired, altered or modified in any way unless such modification is
approved in writing by the Supplier; (iii) improperly installed or used in violation of instructions furnished by
Suprema.
Suprema shall be notified in writing of defects in the RMA (Return Material Authorization) report supplied by
Suprema not later than thirty days after such defects have appeared and at the latest one year after the
date of shipment of the Product. The report should include full details of each defective product, model
number, invoice number, and serial number. No product without an RMA number issued by Suprema may
be accepted and all defects must be reproducible for warranty service.
Except as expressly provided herein, the products are provided "as is" without warranty of any kind, either
express or implied, including, but not limited to, warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is provided in connection with Suprema products. No license, express or
implied, by estoppels or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document, except as
provided in Suprema's Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products.
Suprema assumes no liability whatsoever and Suprema disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating
to sale and/or use of Suprema products, including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular
purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right.
Suprema products are not intended for use in medical, life saving, or life sustaining applications or other
applications in which the failure of the Suprema product could create a situation where personal injury or
death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Suprema products for any such unintended or
unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Suprema and its officers, employees, subsidiaries,
affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, expenses, and reasonable attorney
fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such
unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Suprema was negligent regarding the
design or manufacture of the part.
Suprema reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without
notice to improve reliability, function, or design. Designers must not rely on the absence or characteristics
of any features or instructions marked "reserved" or "undefined." Supreme reserves these for future
definition and shall have no responsibility whatsoever for conflicts or incompatibilities arising from future
changes to them.
Please contact Suprema, local Suprema sales representatives or local distributors to obtain the latest
specifications before placing your order.
Copyright Notice
This document is copyrighted © 2008-2010 by Suprema, Inc. All rights reserved. All other product names,
trademarks, or registered trademarks are property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
xi
01
About the BioStar
System
BioStar is Suprema's next-generation access control system, based on IP connectivity and
biometric security. Most system devices integrate fingerprint scanners and card readers for
multiple levels of user authentication. However, Suprema's biometric devices, installed at
each door, work not only as card or fingerprint scanners and card readers, but also as
intelligent access controllers.
The licensed standard edition of BioStar is unlocked by a USB dongle. Without the dongle,
BioStar functions as a free, but limited-capability version. With the dongle, BioStar offers
greater versatility and additional features, as shown in the table below:
Standard Edition
Free Version
Maximum # of doors
512
20
Maximum # of clients
32
2
Zone support
Yes
No
Email notifications
Yes
No
Server matching
Yes
No
Shift types
Daily and Weekly
Weekly only
IO board
Yes
No
Visual Map
Yes
No
BioStar V1.61 supports the following devices:
•
BioStation (V1.5 or later) - BioStation is a multifunctional
terminal with a keypad and a 2.5-inch color LCD monitor that
allows you to perform user enrollment and administration
functions directly from the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
1
1. About the BioStar System
BioStation can be connected to a network via a wireless LAN or Ethernet and
includes USB host and device interfaces for easy data transfer. BioStation MIFARE
(BSM) models also support entry control via smart cards.
•
BioStation T2 – BioStation T2 is a multifunctional, IP-based access
control terminal with a camera, 5-inch touchscreen, fingerprint
scanner, card reader, and built-in video phone feature.
•
D-Station - D-Station is a multifunctional, IP-based access control
terminal with a camera, touchscreen, and dual fingerprint scanners
that allows for multiple authorization combinations via fingerprint
recognition (single or dual), MIFARE access cards, user IDs, and
face detection. D-Station can be powered directly via an Ethernet
connection to eliminate the need for additional wiring or power
connections.
•
FaceStation – FaceStation is a multifunctional, IP-based access
control terminal with an LCD touchscreen and a camera for face
recognition and videophone functions. FaceStation supports
multiple interfaces for connecting to computers or networks and
access controls via Wiegand and I/O ports. In addition, the device
allows for authorization via multiple access cards.
•
BioEntry Plus (V1.2 or later) - BioEntry Plus is an IP-based access
control device that includes both fingerprint recognition and entry via
access card. The device can be controlled independently via command
cards or managed entirely via the BioStar interface. BioEntry Plus can
be connected to electric door strikes via an internal relay or used with
the Secure I/O device for extra security and expanded capability.
•
BioEntry W – The BioEntry W includes all of the features of the BioEntry
Plus in a vandal-resistant, IP65-rated structure. BioEntry W is ideal for
outdoor installation, with exceptional durability in harsh environments. It
features extensive communication interfaces and PoE cabability.
•
BioLite Net (V1.0 or later) - BioLite Net is IP-based fingerprint
terminal designed specifically for outdoor use. With a rugged, IP65rated waterproof structure, it offers extra durability to withstand the
elements. As either a simple door control or part of a complex,
networked environment, BioLite Net supports the full functionality of
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
2
1. About the BioStar System
BioStar’s time and attendance and access control features.
•
Xpass - Xpass is an IP-based access reader/controller designed
exclusively for use with RF cards. It provides many similar functions to
the BioEntry Plus device, but is waterproof for outdoor use and can be
connected and powered by a single CAT5/6 cable.
•
Xpass Slim - The XPass Slim device is a slimmer version of the Xpass
that supports FeliCa and ISO 15693 cards. Its low profile allows it to
be installed in tight spaces and it features access control to floors
when connected with a LIFT I/O device via RS485 slave.
•
X-Station - X-Station is an easy-to-use smart IP terminal with a 3.5inch touchscreen LCD that supports ID and card access only. The
device supports face detection with a built-in camera. X-Station
allows you to store up to 200,000 users with 1GB of internal flash
memory and 256MB of RAM.
•
BioMini/BioMini Plus - The BioMini and BioMini Plus devices
are fingerprint scanners that can be used for convenient user
enrollment. Installing the device is simple: plug them into a USB
connection on any computer that is connected to the BioStar
server and install a driver.
•
Secure I/O - The Secure I/O device provides a convenient way to increase the
security of externally mounted devices or expand the
capabilities of your system. When doors are controlled by a
secure I/O device, intruders cannot open doors even if they
succeed in uninstalling external devices. To further increase
security, the secure I/O device provides encrypted
communications between door components. The Secure I/O
device has four input switches and two output relays to allow
control of multiple components with a single device.
•
LIFT I/O – The LIFT I/O supports 0-9 device IDs and has 12
input and 12 output Ports. Each output can be connected to an
elevator button to control access to floors. The LIFT I/O can be
connected via RS485 as a slave to Xpass and Xpass Slim
devices. Up to 10 LIFT I/O devices can be connected to an
Xpass or Xpass Slim device to control up to 120 floors.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
3
1. About the BioStar System
1.1
Logical Configuration
BioStar is a distributed intelligence system. Instead of the complex wiring and
centralized control required by conventional access control systems, Suprema's
access control devices can be connected via TCP/IP or wirelessly to a local area
network or connected directly via serial connections. User information, access
rules, and other data can be distributed to each device to speed up authorization
time and provide continual operation even when the connection to the network is
lost.
As the following graphic illustrates, the BioStar system does not require separate
access controllers. This feature provides a distinct advantage over other access
control systems, because BioStation, BioEntry Plus, or BioEntry W devices act
simultaneously as both a controller and a reader. As a result, Suprema's
distributed intelligence approach requires less hardware and less wiring than
conventional, centralized access control systems.
BioStar is a server-client application that supports up to 32 clients (2 clients
maximum in the free version). A typical configuration consists of numerous
access control devices connected to a central server via Ethernet, WLAN, and/or
RS485. BioStar is compatible with MS SQL Server and MySQL databases.
Overall, the system supports a maximum of 512 doors and 512 devices (20 doors
and devices in the free version). Networked devices can be easily grouped together
to create various combinations of anti-passback or alarm zones, as illustrated by
the graphic that follows.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
4
1. About the BioStar System
1.2
Access Control Features
The BioStar system goes a step beyond conventional access control systems, by
combining unique biometric identification with configurable access card
capabilities.
1.2.1
User Authentication
Suprema's access control devices incorporate advanced, award-winning
fingerprint recognition algorithms to provide secure access control. When used
with the numerical keypads on BioStation terminals or the face detection features
of the D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2, and FaceStation devices, the system
allows for a wide variety of user authentication modes:
• Fingerprint or access card - either a fingerprint scan or access card may be
used to gain entry.
• Fingerprint + access card - both fingerprint scan and access card are
required for access.
• User ID + fingerprint - a user ID and fingerprint scan are used in
combination; the user ID identifies the user and the fingerprint scan is used for
authorization.
• User ID + password - a user ID and password are used in combination; the
user ID identifies the user and the password is used for authorization.
• User ID + card + fingerprint - a user ID, access card, and fingerprint scan are
used in combination.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5
1. About the BioStar System
• Fingerprint only - authentication via a fingerprint scan is the only method to
gain entry.
• Card only - authentication via an access card is the only method to gain entry.
[D-Station Only]
• Fingerprint + fingerprint - dual fingerprints are used in fusion.
• Fingerprint + face detection - a fingerprint and face detection are used in
fusion.
• Fingerprint + fingerprint + face detection - dual fingerprints and face
detection are used in fusion.
[FaceStation Only]
• Face - authentication via face recognition is the only method to gain entry.
• Face + Password - authentication via face recognition plus password.
• Face + Card - authentication via face recognition plus access card.
• Face + Card or Password - authentication via face recognition plus access
card or password.
• Face + Card + Password - authentication via face recognition plus card plus
password.
• User ID + Face - authentication via user ID plus face recognition.
• User ID + Face or Password - authentication via user ID plus face regognition
or password.
• User ID + Face + Password - authentication via user ID plus face recognition
plus password.
[D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2, and FaceStation]
• Detect face - upon successful authentication, a face image is captured.
BioStar stores two templates of each fingerprint and up to two fingerprints per
user (four templates total). If desired, one fingerprint can be used as a duress
signal, to activate alarms or send alerts in situations where a user is required to
gain access under duress. Duplicate templates of each print enhance
authentication performance by reducing the likelihood of false rejections. For
more information about registering fingerprints, see section 3.6.2.
BioStar also provides administrators with the ability to read EM4100 and HID
proximity cards and read, issue, and format MIFARE® and iCLASS® access cards.
For more information about access cards, see section 3.6.4.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
6
1. About the BioStar System
D-Station devices allow the system to store images of users and control access via
face detection, in addition to fingerprint, access card, and user ID authentication.
D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2 and FaceStation devices are equipped with
cameras to allow for face detection and recording of face images for enhanced
security. For more information about face detection, see section 3.6.3.
1.2.2
User Management
BioStar supports both manual and automatic modes for user management.
Manual synchronization is available for enrolling different subsets of users to
particular devices or when the total number of users in the BioStar database
exceeds the limits of a BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite Net, Xpass,
Xpass Slim, D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2 or FaceStation device. Automatic
synchronization is available when managing user records at the device is not
required or desired.
BioStar collects log records from devices and allows the data to be exported to a
delimited text file (.CSV) for custom reporting. The software supports an unlimited
number of user records—the maximum amount of data stored is subject only to
the capabilities of the underlying database and hardware configuration. For more
information about user management, see sections 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, and 4.6.
1.2.3
Access Group Management
BioStar allows administrators to build custom access groups by combining
permissions for timezones and doors. With this capability, BioStar provides
customizable, scheduled access control.
BioStar supports up to 128 timezones that consist of a seven day schedule, plus
two holiday schedules. Each day in a timezone can include as many as five
distinct time periods.
In total, BioStar supports up to 128 access groups that can be transferred to all
connected devices. For more information about access groups, see section 3.8.
1.2.4
Device Management
Administrators can control multiple aspects of devices via the BioStar software. In
addition to authentication behaviors, BioStar supports the configuration of inputs,
output relays, actions, and sounds. The system includes options for customizing
sound and display settings for BioStation, D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2
and FaceStation devices, and LED & Buzzer settings for other devices.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
7
1. About the BioStar System
The system provides configuration options for controlling external devices, such
as door strikes and alarm sirens. BioStar can also connect to and communicate
with third-party devices via a Wiegand interface. For more information about
device management, see sections 3.2 and 4.7.
1.2.5
Door and Elevator (Lift) Management
BioStar allows for comprehensive control of doors and connected devices, such as
door relays, alarm relays, door sensors, and exit switches. Each door can be
operated by up to two devices and, when two devices are connected to a door,
administrators can apply anti-passback controls. BioStar also allows for control of
elevators (lifts) via Xpass and Xpass Slim devices, with Secure I/O devices
connected as slaves.
BioStar allows specific configuration of alarm events for doors that are forced
open or held open longer than a specified interval, including activating alarm
sounds from individual devices, sending signals to external alarm sirens,
displaying warnings in the BioStar user interface, and sending e-mail notifications
(not available in the free version). In addition, administrators or operators can
remotely lock and unlock doors or reset alarms. For more information about door
management, see sections 3.3, 4.3, and 4.4. For more information about elevator
management, see section 3.4.
1.2.6
Zone Management
The BioStar system gives administrators complete control of various zones (not
available in the free version). Zones can be created with devices connected via
Ethernet or RS485 and can include a master device and up to 65 member devices.
In addition, individual devices can be included in up to four zones.
BioStar supports zones for increased access control, such as anti-passback and
entrance limit zones, as well as zones that provide control for alarm or fire alarm
outputs and actions. BioStar also allows administrators to synchronize time,
event logs, and user data for all devices in a specified zone. For more information
about zone management, see section 3.5.
1.2.7
Time and Attendance
BioStar versions 1.2 and higher include time and attendance features to allow
administrators to define time categories, shifts, daily schedules, and holiday
settings. The T&A capabilities of BioStar can be used to enforce compliance with
check-in and check-out procedures, restrict access to off-duty personnel, and
report attendance data.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
8
1. About the BioStar System
BioStar allows administrators to customize T&A functions for BioStation, DStation, X-Station, BioStation T2 and FaceStation devices and to specify how
events are recorded. The BioStar interface also allows administrators to monitor a
user’s check-in and check-out status in real time. For more information about
time and attendance, see sections 3.9 and 4.6.
1.2.8
IP Camera and NVR Server Management
BioStar versions 1.5 and higher support internet protocol (IP) cameras and
network video recorder (NVR) servers, to allow administrators to monitor areas
and be notified of specific events with real-time still images transferred from the
IP cameras. By interoperating with the NVR servers, the BioStar system can also
display time-sorted event logs, together with recorded videos stored on the servers.
From the BioStar interface, administrators can add and customize IP cameras
and their functions. For more information about the IP cameras and NVR servers,
see sections 3.11 and 4.1.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
9
02
Install the BioStar
Software
Installing BioStar is a fairly simplistic process, provided that you address a few
prerequisites before beginning the installation:
•
First, you must select a PC that can remain running constantly to function as the
BioStar server. The server will receive and store log data from connected devices in
real time.
•
Second, you must choose a type of database to use. The BioStar server supports
either MySQL or MS SQL Server (including the scaled-down, free MS SQL Server
Express). Regardless of which database you choose, you must have sufficient access
rights and privileges to connect to the database and create new tables.
•
Third, ensure that the PCs you will use for both server and client applications meet
the minimum requirements listed in section 2.1.
The BioStar installation CD includes a BioStar express installer, a BioStar server installer,
and a BioStar client installer. The express installer will install both the server and client
applications with minimal input (see section 2.2). However, you may choose to install the
server and client applications independently if you need to specify additional database
options or desire to install the applications on separate PCs (see sections 2.3 and 2.4).
2.1
System Requirements
BioStar supports the following operating systems:
• Windows 7
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Vista
• Windows XP, Service Pack 1 or later
• Windows 2003
• Windows 2000, Service Pack 4 or later
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
10
2. Install the BioStar Software
The minimum system requirements for installing and operating the BioStar
software include the following:
• CPU - Intel Pentium or similar processor, capable of processing speeds of 1GHz
or faster
• RAM - 512MB
• HDD - 5GB
However, Suprema recommends the following hardware configuration for optimal
performance:
• CPU - Intel Pentium Dual Core or similar processor, capable of processing
speeds of 2GHz or faster
• RAM - 1GB for Windows XP; 2GB for other operating systems
• HDD - 10GB
2.2
Run the BioStar Express Installer
You should run the BioStar express installer when you desire to install both the
server and client applications on the same PC and are willing to use the MS SQL
Server Express database with default settings. You will be required to intervene in
the express installation process only when MS SQL Server or a variation is
already installed. In this case, you will be asked whether or not you wish to install
MS SQL Server Express. If you choose not to install the express version, you will
be required to provide the correct authentication details, as described in step 7 of
section 2.3.
!
Attention: If you have installed a previous installation on the machine with
BioStar express installer, remove the old version before runninng the BioStar
Express installer.
The express installer will install the following components:
• BioStar server application
• Auxiliary libraries - OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable
• MS SQL Server Express
• BioStar client application
• BADB Conv (database migration tool)
Before you run the BioStar express installer, close all other open applications. If
you have previously installed BioAdmin on the same machine, ensure that you
stop the BioAdmin server before beginning the installation. To run the express
installer,
1. Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
11
2. Install the BioStar Software
2. Locate the installation directory and run BioStar 1.61 Express Setup.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to begin the installation.
Note: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include drivers for connecting BioStation and
D-Station devices via USB in Windows 7. These drivers will not work with older versions of
BioStar. If you are using an older version of BioStar be sure to install the correct USB
drivers.
2.3
Install the BioStar Server Application
If you do not choose to use the express installer, you must install the BioStar
server and client applications separately. After you ensure that your
system meets the minimum requirements listed in section 2.1 and address the
prerequisites mentioned in the introduction to this chapter, close all other open
applications. If you have previously installed BioAdmin on the same machine,
ensure that you stop the BioAdmin server before beginning the installation.
!
Attention: If you have performed a previous installation on the machine with
BioStar Express installer, remove the old version before running the BioStar
Server installer.
The BioStar server installer will add the following components to your system:
• BioStar server application
• MS SQL Server Express (optional)
• Auxiliary libraries - OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable
• BADB Conv (database migration tool)
To install the BioStar server application,
1. Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
2. Locate the installation directory and run BioStar 1.61 Server Setup.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to begin the installation.
4. During the installation, you will be required to accept the OpenSSL license
agreement and select a destination folder for the OpenSSL program files.
5. You will also be asked whether or not you wish to install the MS SQL Server
Express edition. If you will use a pre-installed version of MS SQL Server,
MySQL or Oracle, you may click No when this message appears. If you decide
to use the express edition in this step, you can skip to step 7. The database
setup process will be automated when you install the express edition.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
12
2. Install the BioStar Software
6. When the Create Database [BioStar] window appears, select a database type
(MS SQL Server, MySQL or Oracle). The database server address and port
numbers will be automatically populated, but you should verify that they are
correct.
Note: The default name for the database is always “BioStar,” to prevent unintentional
installation of multiple databases on the same system or database server. The
database name can be changed by editing the DBSetup.exe file. When patching the
database server, you will have the option to manually select a datbase.
7. If you choose MS SQL Server, you must configure the authentication method
as well (MySQL allows only server authentication):
• Server authentication - this option uses login IDs and passwords to
authenticate users that are created by and stored on the SQL Server.
These credentials are not based on Windows user accounts. Users
connecting via server authentication must provide their credentials every
time that they connect.
•
Windows authentication - this option uses Windows users accounts for
authentication. When users connect through a Windows user account, the
SQL Server validates the account name and password using the Windows
principal token in the operating system. The SQL Server does not ask for a
password and does not independently validate user identification. Windows
authentication is the default authentication mode for MS SQL Server.
Note: You must choose the authentication mode that is supported by the database.
You must also provide the proper credentials to create new tables in the database.
8. Click Setup to create the SQL database.
9. When the SQL database setup is complete, click Finish.
10. The setup program will perform a few remaining processes before the
server installation is complete. Click Finish.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
13
2. Install the BioStar Software
Note: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include drivers for connecting BioStation and DStation devices via USB in Windows 7. These drivers will not work with older versions of
BioStar. If you are using an older version of BioStar be sure to install the correct USB
drivers.
2.3.1
Configure the MySQL Database
BioStar cannot use the MySQL database if the maximum packet size is less than
16MB. To configure the maximum packet size n MySQL server, locate and open a
configuration file for the MySQL server (“my.ini” for a Windows system or “my.cnf”
for a Linux system). Under [mysqld], add or edit the packet size to 16M or bigger
(for example: max_allowed_packet=16M). After you have changed and saved the
file, restart the BioStar Server for the changes to take effect.
2.3.2
Configure the BioStar Server
In some cases, you may require manual configuration of the BioStar server. If you
are having trouble connecting to the server from the client application, for
example, you may need to alter your server settings. In addition, you must stop
and restart the server application to apply any changes you have made to server
configurations or database settings.
To open the server configuration utility, locate and run the BSServerConfig.exe file.
By default, a shortcut to this utility will be added to the desktop during
installation of the BioStar server. You may also locate this file inside the “Server”
folder where the BioStar application was installed.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
14
2. Install the BioStar Software
The server configuration utility allows you to monitor and control the following:
• Status - view and modify the current status of the BioStar server (Stopped or
Started). You can stop and start the server by clicking the Start or Stop button
on the right.
• Connection - view and modify the details for the connection between the
server and devices.
-
TCP Port - enter the port that devices and client applications use to
connect to the server. You should use a port that is not shared with any
other software applications. In most cases, you can use the default port
(1480).
-
Thread Count - enter the maximum thread count that the BioStar server
can create. You can enter any number between 32 and 512; however, keep
in mind a larger thread count will consume more system resources.
-
Client List - click this button to view a list of devices that are connected to
the BioStar server. The list shows the IP address of each device and
whether or not a SSL certificate has been issued to the device. You can
issue or remove SSL certificates directly from the utility.
• Database - view and modify database settings. For more information about
how to alter these settings, see the procedure for setting up the BioStar server
in section 2.3.
-
Max Connection - specify the maximum number of connections between
the server and the database. In most cases, the default value (1) is
appropriate.
• SSL - view or modify the settings for OpenSSL. Click Browse to locate the path
for the OpenSSL application or click Change to change the pass phrase.
2.4
Install the BioStar Client Application
Before you install the BioStar client application, close all other running
applications. The client application installer will add the following components to
your system:
• BioStar client application
• Auxiliary libraries - OpenSSL and Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Redistributable
To install BioStar client application,
1. Insert the BioStar installation CD into a compatible media drive.
2. Run BioStar 1.61 Client Setup to launch the installation wizard.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
15
2. Install the BioStar Software
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to install the BioStar Client.
Note: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include drivers for connecting BioStation and DStation devices via USB in Windows 7. These drivers will not work with older versions of
BioStar. If you are using an older version of BioStar be sure to install the correct USB
drivers.
2.4.1
Log in to BioStar for the First Time
If you restarted the system after installation, the BioStar server should run
automatically in the background. If you have not restarted the system, you may
be required to manually connect to the server before proceeding (see section 2.3.2).
When logging in to BioStar for the first time, you will be prompted to create an
administrator account.
To log in for the first time,
1. Launch the BioStar program. If BioStar successfully connects to the server,
the Add New Administrator window will open automatically. In this case, skip
to step 6. If BioStar cannot connect to the server, the Login window will open
and display the message “Cannot connect to server.”
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
16
2. Install the BioStar Software
2. Click Server Setting. This will open the “Connect Server” window.
3. Enter the IP address and port number of the BioStar server.
4. Click Test to verify the connection.
5. Click Save to store the connection settings. This will open the Add New
Administrator window.
6. Enter an Admin ID and password, confirm the password, and choose an
administration level from the drop-down level.
7. Click OK. This will return you to the login window.
8. Enter a User ID and password and click Login.
2.5
Customize the BioStar Interface
You do not have to make any changes to the interface to use the BioStar system—
the default settings are sufficient for setup and operation. However, BioStar
allows you to customize various settings to control the appearance and
functionality of the interface.
2.5.1
Change the Theme
The BioStar interface includes two preset themes based on MS Office styles:
• Office 2003
• Office 2007
To change the theme, click Theme from the menu bar and select a theme.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
17
2. Install the BioStar Software
2.5.2
Customize the Toolbar
The BioStar interface includes a standard toolbar near the top left of the window.
Standard toolbar buttons provide functions similar to a typical web browser: Back,
Forward, Refresh, Find User (search), and Print.
To customize the toolbar,
1. Click the drop-down arrow at the right of the toolbar.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons > Customize. This will open the Customize
window.
3. Click the Commands tab.
4. Click All Commands to display a list of available buttons.
5. Drag a command to the toolbar. This will add a new button for the command.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
18
2. Install the BioStar Software
2.5.3
Change Event Views
BioStar allows you to change the default period of events to show in the Event tab
for users or doors and zones. You can set the interface to show event details for 1
day, 3 days, or 1 week by default. To change the event view,
1. From the menu bar, click View > Event View.
2. Click type of event view to change (User or Doors/Zone).
3. Click a default event period (1 day, 3 day, or 7 day).
2.6
Migrate a Database from BioAdmin to BioStar
The BioStar installation program includes a database migration tool called BADB
Conv. This tool allows you to migrate an existing BioAdmin database to your new
BioStar system.
When migrating a database, any identical information that exists in the BioStar
database will be overwritten. For example, if you have added a user to BioStar
that previously existed in BioAdmin, the user data will be overwritten with the
information from the BioAdmin database. For this reason, you should migrate
your old database to BioStar before creating new user accounts. To migrate your
information from BioAdmin to BioStar,
1. Locate and run the migration program, BADBConv.exe. By default, this tool
will be installed in the same folder as the BioStar software.
2. Click Yes to acknowledge the warning dialogue that appears to remind you
that identical information in BioStar will be overwritten.
3. Click Start to begin the migration. When the process is complete, the Convert
DB window will show the types of data that have been migrated.
4. Click Close to exit the migration tool.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
19
3. Setup the BioStar System
03
Setup the BioStar
System
This section describes how to add administrator accounts, devices, doors, zones,
departments, users, and access groups and setup time and attendance within the BioStar
software. This administrator's guide does not cover procedures for installing physical
components, wiring doors and devices, or connecting devices to networks. For more
information about hardware installation and physical configuration of your access control
system, please refer to the installation guides that accompany your access control devices.
3.1
Create Administrative Accounts
Before adding users, it is a good idea to add and configure accounts for system
administrators and operators. It is also useful to understand some general
concepts regarding administration of the BioStar system.
3.1.1
Administrative Levels
BioStar allows for multiple levels of administration, operation, and interaction
with the system. Each administrative level has varying degrees of privileges and
access to the system menus (User, Doors, Visual Map, Access Control, Monitoring,
Devices, and Time & Attendance). The BioStar system includes three preset
administrator levels in addition to custom administrator levels:
• Administrator
•
Operator
•
Manager
•
Custom administrator levels
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
20
3. Setup the BioStar System
Administrators are capable of adding and configuring devices, users, doors, zones,
and access groups. They also can manage time and attendance functions,
including setting up time categories, daily schedules, shifts, holiday rules, and
leave periods, as well as creating, modifying, and viewing time and attendance
reports. In addition, administrators can create custom administrator levels that
are granted various privileges for the BioStar system menus.
Operators can monitor and manage the BioStar system via a remote client
terminal. Operators have the same privileges with administrators, other than the
privileges to create and delete other administrator or operator accounts. Like
administrators, operators are capable of adding and configuring devices, users,
doors, zones, and access groups. They also can manage time and attendance
functions, including setting up time categories, daily schedules, shifts, holiday
rules, and leave periods, as well as creating, modifying, and viewing time and
attendance reports.
Managers have privileges to read all information in the menus. However, they
cannot create, modify, or delete anything in the menus. Depending on your
organization’s requirements, the capability to view events may be useful for other
management purposes.
The custom administrator level can be assigned full or limited privileges on the
seven menus. On each menu, you can assign one of three privileges: All Rights,
Modify, or Read. Depending on your organization’s requirements, the BioStar
system can be managed more effectively by adding custom administrator levels.
A typical setup will consist of one administrator (or more, depending on the size of
your organization) who has full access to the system. Below the administrator
level, several operators may perform various functions, such as remotely
controlling doors and locks, adding users, registering fingerprints, issuing access
cards, adding access groups, defining timezones, and configuring alarm events.
3.1.2
Add and Customize Administrative Accounts
By default, BioStar includes one administrator account, which is added when you
install the software (see section 2.3). You may choose to use this account as the
sole administrator and grant operator privileges to all other users who will
manage the system or you may choose to add multiple administrators to the
system.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
21
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.1.2.1
Add an administrative account
To add an administrative account,
1. From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to
open the Admin Account List window.
2. Click Add New Administrator.
3. In the Add New Administrator window, enter an Admin ID and
password.
4. Confirm the password by retyping it and select an Admin Level from
the drop-down list:
• Administrator - all privileges.
•
Operator - all privileges, other than creating or deleting
administrator or operator accounts.
•
Manager - privilege to read all information.
5. Click OK.
3.1.2.2
Change an administrative account level or password
If you accidentally set the wrong level for an administrative account or
need to change or reset a password, you can do so from the Administrator
menu.
To change an administrative level or password,
1. From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to
open the Admin Account List window.
2. Click an admin account in the list on the left side of the window.
3. Click Modify Level/Password. This will open the Modify
Administrator window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
22
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Edit the account information as required:
• To change the administrative level, choose a new level from the
drop-down list.
•
To change the password, type a new password in both the New
Password and Confirm boxes.
5. Click OK to save the changes.
3.1.2.3
Create a custom administration level
f you need to define a specific administrator role with particular privileges,
you can add a custom administrator level. You can allow full or limited
access to any of BioStar’s seven menus for the custom administrator level:
User, Doors, Visual Map, Access Control, Monitoring, Devices, and Time
& Attendance.
The custom administrator level can be assigned privileges for specific
users and devices. A custom administrator will have the privileges you
assign (All Rights, Modify, or Read) only for those users or devices that
you specify and will not be allowed to view or modify other users or
devices. While you are creating a custom administrator level, in the User
menu, you can grant privileges for users in a department and its sub
departments. However, ensure that you do not select individual users, but
rather the first-level or second-level departments they belong to.
In the Device menu, you can grant privileges for specific devices. If a
device has a slave device connected, the privileges for the host device will
also apply to the slave device. Users and devices that are not selected in
the User and Device menus will not appear in the Doors, Visual Map,
Access Control, Monitoring, and Time and Attendance menus. If a door or
zone is associated with devices that are not granted privileges, the door or
zone will not appear in the Door menu.
To create a custom administrator level,
1. From the menu bar, click Administrator > Admin Account to
open the Admin Account List window.
2. Click Custom Level Setting.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
23
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. From the Custom Level List window, click Add Custom Level. This
will open the Add/Modify Custom Level window.
4. Type a name for the custom level in the Name field.
5. If desired, add an additional description in the Description field.
6. Select a menu from the drop-down list.
7. When selecting the User Menu or Device Menu, select users or devices
to grant access privileges by clicking the checkboxes in the users or
devices list.
8. Select a permission level (All Rights, Modify, or Read) by clicking the
checkbox next to an option.
9. Click Add to include the permission in the custom level.
10. Repeat steps 6-9 as necessary to add other permissions.
11. When you are finished customizing the level, click Save.
You can now create new administrative accounts with any of the custom
administrator levels you have created.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
24
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2
Setup Devices
This section describes how to use BioStar's device wizard to search for and add
new devices, as well as how to add 3rd party RF devices. In addition, the
procedures that follow describe basic configuration of devices within the BioStar
system. For more information about configuring devices, see sections 3.10.3 and
5.1.
3.2.1
Search for and Add Devices
BioStar includes a handy wizard for finding and adding devices. Before starting a
search for new devices, verify the device connections. If you have multiple devices
to add, it may be helpful to prepare a list of device locations, IDs, and IP
addresses prior to adding them.
To search for devices and add them to the BioStar system,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the Task pane, click Add Device.
3. When the wizard appears, click the radio button next to a connection type:
• LAN - Choose this option to search for devices connected via Ethernet or
Wireless LAN.
•
Serial - Choose this option to search for devices connected to a client PC
via RS485 and RS232 or slave devices connected via RS485 to another
device that is connected to a client PC (see section 3.2.2).
•
USB Device - Choose this option to search for devices connected via USB
ports.
Note: BioStar versions 1.3 and higher include drivers for connecting BioStation
and D-Station devices via USB in Windows 7. These drivers will not work with
older versions of BioStar. If you are using an older version of BioStar be sure to
install the correct USB drivers.
•
Virtual USB Device - Choose this option to search for virtual devices that
you have added to a USB drive.
4. Click Next.
5. For USB or Virtual USB searches, skip to step 7. If you are searching for
devices connected via LAN or serial ports, set advanced search criteria:
• LAN - Select whether to search for devices using TCP or UDP protocols.
When you select TCP, you can specify an IP address range, the type of
device you are searching for (BioStation/D-Station/X-Station/BioStation
T2/FaceStation: 1470, BioEntry Plus/BioEntry W/BioLite Net/
Xpass/Xpass Slim: 1471, or Custom: enter manually), and the port to
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
25
3. Setup the BioStar System
search with. If you select UDP, you can search for devices only in the same
subnet.
•
Serial - Specify a COM port (or select All port) and a baud rate.
6. Click Next.
7. When BioStar completes the search, you can specify network settings as
described below. Click a device name in the list on the left and then configure
the settings as required:
Note: If you change the network settings for a device at this point, the device will be
removed from the device list. To add the device in the following steps, you must search
for the device again.
You need not and should not add devices with server mode. The devices will connect to
the server by themselves, and will be listed under the BioStar Server on the Device
Tree window. If you are trying to add devices with server mode, the process will fail.
•
DHCP or Static IP - If you choose to use the DHCP option, the device will
automatically acquire network settings from the DHCP server. If you do not
use DHCP, you must configure the network settings manually.
•
Direct connection - This is the default connection option. With this option,
the BioStar client will connect directly to the device. If you choose this type
of connection, the BioStar client must be running to retrieve the log
records from the device.
•
Server connection - If you choose this option, the device will
automatically connect to the BioStar server. If you configure the server IP
address and port correctly, log records from the device will be gathered at
the server, regardless of whether or not the BioStar client is online. This
option may also be useful if your network configuration requires you to
connect devices with private IP addresses (for example, over a WAN) to a
server with a public IP address. This option also provides SSL encryption
for BioStation devices.
8. Click Next.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
26
3. Setup the BioStar System
9. Select the device or devices to add by clicking the checkboxes next to the
device IDs.
10. Click Add to add the devices to the BioStar system.
11. Close the confirmation message that appears and click Finish to exit the
wizard.
3.2.2
Search for and Add Slave Devices
A distinctive feature of BioStar is that it supports host and slave devices in RS485
networks. With this feature, only the host device must be connected to a PC via
the LAN. The network can then be easily expanded by adding slave devices via
RS485 connections. This feature also allows for controlling elevator (lift) access
with Xpass and Xpass Slim devices that are connected to LIFT I/O devices.
If your configuration includes slave devices, you must perform an additional
search to locate and add those devices.
First, configure the host device:
1. Search for and add the host device as described in section 3.2.1.
2. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
3. In the navigation pane, click the host device.
4. In the device pane, click the Network tab.
5. Change the RS485 serial setting by selecting Host from the Mode drop-down
list.
6. Click Apply to save the change.
Next, search for and add slave devices:
1. In the navigation pane, right-click the host device and click Add Device
(Serial). This will open the Search and Add Device window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
27
3. Setup the BioStar System
2. Click Next to begin the search.
3. When BioStar completes the search, click Next.
4. Select the device or devices to add by clicking the checkboxes next to the
device IDs.
5. Click Add to add the device
6. Close the confirmation message that appears and click Finish to exit the
wizard.
7. In the navigation pane, click the slave device.
8. In the device pane, click the Network tab.
9. Change the RS485 serial setting by selecting Slave from the Mode drop-down
list.
10. Click Apply to save the change.
3.2.3
Add an RF Device
Prior to BioStar 1.2, third-party RF devices connected to Suprema devices
(BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, and BioLite Net devices), operated only as
physical extensions to the Suprema devices. As of BioStar 1.2, third-party RF
devices connected to Suprema devices function independently and can be
associated with doors and included in zones.
To add an RF device,
1. Connect the RF device to a Suprema device.
2. Ensure that the Suprema device is added to the BioStar system (see section
3.2.1).
3. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
4. In the navigation pane, click the Suprema device name.
5. Click the Wiegand tab and specify Wiegand settings as described below.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
28
3. Setup the BioStar System
a. Select Extended in the Wiegand Mode drop-down list.
b. Select Wiegand (Card) in the Wiegand Input drop-down list.
c. Click Apply at the bottom of the pane.
6. In the navigation pane, right-click the BioStation device name and then click
Add RF Device.
Note: For more information about using your third-party RF device, consult the user
guidance for the RF device. The Wiegand format must be configured properly to ensure
compatibility with third-party RF devices.
3.2.4
Configure a BioStation Device
This section provides an overview of configuring BioStation devices to work with
the BioStar software. For more information, refer to the installation guides that
accompany your devices. To configure a BioStation device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a BioStation device name in the navigation pane. This will open a
Device pane similar to the one below:
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
29
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.1.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC and adjust settings for operation modes.
•
Fingerprint - Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and
timeout settings for fingerprint recognition.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
•
Input - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the
device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on BioStation
Mifare devices.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
3.2.4.1
Connect a BioStation device via wireless LAN
Certain BioStation devices support wireless LAN connections. To
configure the settings for a wireless LAN connection,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Click a BioStation device name in the navigation pane.
3. Click the Network tab in the Device pane.
4. Select “Wireless LAN” in the Lan Type drop-down list.
5. Select one of the preset configurations in the WLAN section (Preset #1 Preset #4).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
30
3. Setup the BioStar System
6. Click Change Setting in the WLAN section. This will open the
BioStation WLAN Setting window.
7. Configure the following settings:
• Preset Name - enter a name for the configuration that will appear
on the BioStation device connected via WLAN.
•
ESSID - enter the unique ID of the access point.
•
Network Authentication - select a network authentication mode
from the drop-down list (Open System, Shared Key, or WPA-PSK).
The authentication mode must be the same for the device and the
access point.
•
Encryption Strength - select an encryption strength from the
drop-down list (available options depend on network
authentication setting).
•
Network Key - enter the network key.
•
Confirm Key - re-enter the network key.
8. Click OK to save your changes.
3.2.5
Configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W Device
To configure a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
31
3. Setup the BioStar System
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.2.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC, adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust options for
fingerprint recognition.
•
Fingerprint - Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and
timeout settings for fingerprint recognition.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits, access groups,
and time and attendance mode settings.
•
Input - Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on BioEntry Plus or
BioEntry W Mifare devices or iCLASS card access on BioEntry Plus iCLASS
devices.
•
Command Card - Use this tab to issue command cards that can control
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices. For more information about issuing
command cards, see section 3.2.5.1.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer settings
according to the event or status.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
32
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
3.2.5.1
Issue command cards
Command cards allow you to enroll and delete users directly from a
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device. For more information about enrolling
users via command cards, see section 3.6.2.3. For more information
about delete an individual or all users via command cards, see section
4.5.1.1 and 4.5.1.2. To issue command cards,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry
W device.
3. Click the Command Card tab in the Device pane.
4. Click Read Card.
5. Place a command card on the device.
6. Select a command type from the drop-down list.
7. If desired, set the command card to require administrator
authentication by clicking the checkbox next to the option.
8. Click Add.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
33
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2.6
Configure a BioLite Net Device
To configure a BioLite Net device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.3.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC, adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust options for
fingerprint recognition.
•
Fingerprint - Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and
timeout settings for fingerprint recognition.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and access groups.
•
Input - Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on BioLite Net
Mifare devices.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer according to the
event or status.
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
34
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others, select
other devices from the Device Tree window, and click Apply.
3.2.7
Configure an Xpass or Xpass Slim Device
To configure an Xpass or Xpass Slim device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.4 (Xpass) or 5.1.5 (Xpass Slim).
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC, adjust settings for operation modes, and adjust settings for card
ID formats. Xpass Slime devices do not support the Mifare template cards.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and access groups.
•
Input - Use this tab to add or modify inputs to the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add or modify outputs from the device.
•
Command Card - Use this tab to issue command cards that can control
Xpass or Xpass Slim devices. For more information about issuing
command cards, see section 3.2.7.1.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
35
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to configure LED & Buzzer according to the
event or status.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others, select
other devices from the Device Tree window, and click Apply.
3.2.7.1
Issue command cards
Command cards allow you to enroll and delete users directly from an
Xpass or Xpass Slim device. For more information about enrolling users
via command cards, see section 3.6.2.3. For more information about
deleting an individual or all users via command cards, see section 4.5.1.1
and 4.5.1.2. To issue command cards,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of an Xpass device.
3. Click the Command Card tab in the Device pane.
4. Click Read Card.
5. Place a command card on the device.
6. Select a command type from the drop-down list.
7. If desired, set the command card to require administrator
authentication by clicking the checkbox next to the option.
8. Click Add.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
36
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2.8
Configure a D-Station Device
To configure a D-Station device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.6.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC and adjust settings for operation modes.
•
Fingerprint - Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and
timeout settings for fingerprint recognition.
•
Camera - Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be
performed via the camera and the face detection feature.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
•
Input - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the
device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on D-Station
devices.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
37
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
3.2.9
Configure an X-Station Device
To configure an X-Station device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.7.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC and adjust settings for operation modes.
•
Camera - Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be
performed via the camera and the face detection feature.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
38
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
•
Input - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the
device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on X-Station
devices.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
3.2.10 Configure a BioStation T2 Device
To configure a BioStation T2 device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
39
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.8.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC and adjust settings for operation modes.
•
Fingerprint - Use this tab to specify security, quality, matching, and
timeout settings for fingerprint recognition.
•
Camera - Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be
performed via the camera and the face detection feature.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
•
Interphone – Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which
allows communication between people on either side of the door.
•
Input - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the
device.
•
Black List - Use this tab to block MIFARE card access on BioStation T2
devices.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
40
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2.11 Configure a FaceStation Device
To configure a FaceStation device,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Double-click a device name in the navigation pane. This will open a Device
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure device information on the following tabs. For an explanation of
device settings, see section 5.1.8.
• Operation mode - Use this tab to set the device time or retrieve it from a
host PC and adjust settings for operation modes.
•
Face – Use this tab to specify security level and enrollment sensitivity
settings for face recognition.
•
Camera - Use this tab to assign events, by timezone, that can be
performed via the camera and the face detection feature.
•
Network - Use this tab to specify settings for LAN or serial connections.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to specify entrance limits and default access
groups for an individual device.
•
Interphone – Use this tab to set the device to act as an interphone which
allows communication between people on either side of the door.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
41
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Input - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete input settings for the device.
•
Output - Use this tab to add, modify, or delete output settings for the
device.
•
Display/Sound - Use this tab to adjust display or sound settings and add
background images and sounds.
•
T&A - Use this tab to configure time and attendance settings.
•
Wiegand - Use this tab to configure the Wiegand format. For more
information about Wiegand formats, see section 3.2.12.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
5. To apply the same settings to other devices, click Apply to Others and select
other devices from the Device Tree window.
3.2.12 Change Wiegand Formats
From the BioStar interface, you can configure the Wiegand format of a device to
control device inputs and outputs. To configure the Wiegand format,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3. Click the Wiegand tab in the Device pane.
4. Click Change Format. This will open the Wiegand Configuration wizard.
5. Click a radio button to select one of the following formats:
• 26-bit Standard - this format is the most widely used and consists of an
8-bit FC code and a 16-bit ID. You cannot change the bit definition of the
format or the parity bits of this format.
•
Pass-through - use this format to customize only the ID bits. During
verification, if the ID is recognized, the Wiegand input string will pass
through in its original form. You cannot set the parity bits or alternative
values of this format. By definition, the pass-through format is useful only
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
42
3. Setup the BioStar System
when the operation mode is one-to-one (1:1). In one-to-many (1:N) mode,
non-ID bits are set to 0.
•
Custom - with a custom format, you can define the ID bits, parity bits,
and alternative values. During verification, the device will first check the
parity of an input string. If the parity is correct, the device will check the
ID. Only when all verification has been completed will the device send an
output string, which can also be customized to differ from the input string.
6. Use the Wiegand Configuration wizard to customize the Wiegand format to
your specifications (see the subsections that follow for more information).
7. When you have completed making changes with the wizard, click Apply to
save your changes.
3.2.12.1 Configure a 26-bit Wiegand format
When you select a 26-bit format, the only thing you can customize is the
FC Code:
1. After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next until you reach the
Alternative Value window.
2. Click the FC Code checkbox and enter a new FC Code.
3. Click Finish to close the wizard.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
43
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.2.12.2 Configure a pass-through Wiegand format
When you select a pass-through format, you can alter the total number of
bits and assign the ID bits:
1. After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next to advance to the
Format window.
2. If desired, enter a new total number of bits and click Apply.
3. Click the User ID button (I) on the right.
4. Assign ID bits by clicking the appropriate squares.
5. Click Next until you reach the Alternative Value window.
6. Click Finish to close the wizard.
3.2.12.3 Configure a custom Wiegand format
When you select a custom format, you can customize the total number of
bits, assign ID bits, define parity bits, and set alternate values for the
output string.
1. After selecting the format in the wizard, click Next to advance to the
Format window.
2. If desired, enter a new total number of bits and click Apply.
3. Click the User ID button (I) on the right and assign ID bits by clicking
the appropriate squares.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
44
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Click the Even Parity button (E) on the right and assign an even parity
bit by clicking on the appropriate squares.
5. Click the Odd Parity button (O) on the right and assign an odd parity
bit by clicking on the appropriate squares.
6. Click Next.
7. In the Parity window, select the bits that will be used to calculate the
first parity bit.
8. As necessary, click >> and select the bits that will be used to calculate
additional parity bits. You must perform this step for each parity bit
you assigned in steps 4 and 5. If necessary, you can click Initialize
to reset the selection.
9. Click Next.
10. In the Alternative Value window, select a field to customize (non-ID
bits only).
11. Click the Alt Value checkbox and enter a new value for the output
string.
12. Repeat steps 10-11 as necessary to customize the rest of the output
string.
13. Click Finish to close the wizard.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
45
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.3
Setup Doors
This section describes how to setup doors within the BioStar system. For
information about installing physical devices and integrating them with door
components, refer to the user guide that accompanies each device.
3.3.1
Add a Door
To add a door,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Add New Door.
4. Right-click New Door, click Rename, and type a name for the door.
3.3.2
Associate a Device With a Door
BioStar allows you to associate a maximum of two devices with each door. When
using two devices on a door, the devices should be connected to each other via
RS485. See section 5.2 for an explanation of door settings.
To associate a device with a door,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. Right-click a door and click Add Device.
3. Select a device from the Device Tree window by clicking the checkbox next to a
device name.
4. Click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
46
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.3.3
Configure a Door
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. Click the name of a door in the navigation pane. This will open a Doors pane
similar to the one below:
3. Configure door information on the following tabs. For an explanation of door
settings, see section 5.2.
• Details - Use this tab to control the interaction between doors, devices,
locks, and exit buttons. If you add two devices to a door, you can also use
this tab to configure anti-passback settings.
•
Alarm - Use this tab to specify what actions to take when the door is
forced open or held open.
•
Zone - Use this tab to see the zones associated with a door.
•
Access Control - Use this tab to see the access groups associated with a
door.
•
Event - Use this tab to retrieve and monitor an event log for the door.
4. When you are finished configuring the device, click Apply to save your
changes.
3.3.4
Create a Door Group
You can create groups of doors for easier management.
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, right-click Doors and click Add Door Group.
3. Type a name for the group and press Enter.
4. To add a door to the group, click and drag a door to the group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
47
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.4
Setup Elevators (Lifts)
This section describes how to setup elevators within the BioStar system. For
information about installing physical devices and integrating them with elevator
components, refer to the user guide that accompanies each device. BioStar
supports up to 128 elevators (lifts).
3.4.1
Add an Elevator
To add an elevator,
1. Click Lift in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Add New Lift.
3. Right-click New Lift, click Rename, and type a name for the elevator.
3.4.2
Associate a Device With an Elevator
BioStar allows you to associate Xpass or Xpass Slim devices with a LIFT I/O
device to control access to elevators. The LIFT I/O device must be connected to
the Xpass or Xpass Slim device via RS485.
To associate an Xpass or Xpass Slim device with an elevator,
1. Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2. Right-click an elevator name and click Add Reader.
3. Select an Xpass or Xpass Slim device from the Device Tree window by clicking
the checkbox next to a device name.
4. Click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
48
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.4.3
Configure an Elevator
1. Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2. Click the name of an elevator in the navigation pane. This will open a Lifts
pane similar to the one below:
3. Configure elevator information in the following fields:
• LIFT IO - Select a LIFT I/O device to view and change settings.
•
OUTPUT - This field lists the avaialble outputs of the LIFT I/O device.
•
Floor - Use this tab to see the zones associated with a door.
•
Not use - Select the checkbox when you do not use the output port of the
LIFT I/O device. Clear the checkbox to control aceess to floors by
associating outputs with floors.
4. When you are finished configuring the elevator, click Apply to save your
changes.
3.4.4
Add Users to an Elevator
1. Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2. Click the name of an elevator in the navigation pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
49
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. Click Lift Manage Users in the shortcut pane. This will open the Manage Users
window.
4. In the left pane, click a user’s name.
5. In the right pane, click the checkboxes next to floors that you wish to assign
the user to.
6. Click Apply to save your chagnes.
3.4.5
!
Transfer Settings to an Elevator
Attention: When using Xpass or Xpass Slim devices as lift readers,
transferring settings to the device with the User menu will reset all of the
settings and user data stored on the device. To preserve the settings, use the
Transfer to Device function in the Lift menu instead.
To send settings and user data to an Xpass or Xpass Slim device,
1. Click Lifts in the shortcut pane.
2. Click Transfer to Device in the task pane. This will open the Lift Tree window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
50
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. In the lift tree, select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes next to
device names.
4. Click Apply to send the elevator settings to the selected devices.
3.5
Setup Zones
BioStar allows you to provide sophisticated access control with multiple zones.
Zones can be used to control the behavior of devices, doors, and other
components. In addition, zones can be configured to provide different types of
restrictions, such as anti-passback, timed anti-passback, and entrance limits.
The sections below describe how to determine which zones to use and how to add
and configure zones.
3.5.1
Determine Which Zones to Use
In total, the BioStar system supports seven types of zones:
• Access zone - Use this zone to synchronize user or log information. If you
select the user synchronization option, user data enrolled at the devices will be
automatically propagated to other connected devices. If you select the log
synchronization option, all log records will be written to the master device (in
addition to the server), so that you can check log records of member devices.
For information about customizing access zones, see section 5.3.5.
• Anti-passback zone - Use this zone to prevent a user from passing his or her
card back to another person or using his or her fingerprint to allow someone
else to gain entry. The zone supports two types of anti-passback restrictions:
soft and hard. When a user violates the anti-passback protocol, the soft
restriction will record the action in the user's log. The hard restriction will deny
access and record the event in the log when the anti-passback protocol is
violated. For information about customizing anti-passback zones, see section
5.3.1.
• Entrance limit zone - Use this zone to restrict the number of times a user can
enter an area. The entrance limit can be tied to a timezone, so that a user is
restricted to a maximum number of entries during a specified time span. You
can also set time limits for reentry to enforce a timed anti-passback restriction.
For information about customizing entrance limit zones, see section 5.3.2.
• Alarm zone - Use this zone to group inputs from multiple devices into a single
alarm zone. Devices in the alarm zone can be simultaneously armed or
disarmed via an arm or disarm card or a key. For more information about
configuring alarm zones, see sections 3.5.2.4, 3.5.2.5, 3.5.2.6 and 5.3.3.
• Fire alarm zone - Use this zone to control how doors will respond during a fire.
External inputs can be fed into the BioStar system to automatically trigger
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
51
3. Setup the BioStar System
door releases or perform other actions. For more information about
customizing fire alarm zones, see section 5.3.4.
• Muster zone - Use this zone to monitor and track employees during an
emergency or to perform a “roll call” where employees are required to be
present in a particular area at a particular time. Muster zone allows
administrators to determine if any employee has not reported to the muster
area and, if any employee is unaccounted for, take the necessary actions to
locate them. For more information about customizing muster zone, see section
5.3.6.
• Interlock zone - Use this zone to create an interlock area with two doors
equipped with devices. When an external input indicates that one door is open,
the other door is automatically locked to provide a secure interlock area. A
reader-equipped door that does not belong to any other zone can be used to
create up to four interlock zones (four zones maximum per reader). For more
information about configuring an interlock zone, see section 5.3.7.
3.5.2
Add and Configure Zones
When you add a zone, you can use the four tabs in the Zone pane to configure the
zone. For an explanation of zone settings, see section 5.3.
• Details - Add devices and specify inputs or other parameters for a zone.
• Alarm - Specify alarm actions and outputs.
• Access Group - Apply access groups to a zone (not available for fire alarm
zones).
• Event - View events associated with a zone.
3.5.2.1
Add a zone
To add a new zone,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, right-click Zone.
3. Click Add Zone.
4. Type a name for the zone in the Name field.
5. Select a zone type from the drop-down list (see section 3.5.1 for zone
descriptions).
6. Press OK.
The Zone pane will appear on the right side of the window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
52
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.5.2.2
Add a device to a zone
To implement the protocols of a zone, you must associate devices with the
zone. The Details tab (in the Zone pane) contains a Device List that shows
each device associated with a zone (see below).
To add a device to a zone,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of a zone.
3. In the Zone tab, at the bottom of the Device List, click Add Device.
This will open the Add Devices window.
4. Select a device (or multiple devices) from the list and click >.
 Anti-passback zones - when the Select Zone Attribute pop-up
appears, select an attribute from the drop-down list (In Device or Out
Device).
 Alarm zones - when the Select Zone Attribute/Type pop-up appears,
select a device attribute from the drop-down list (General, Arm,
Disarm, or Arm/Disarm). If you select an arm or disarm attribute (or
Arm/Disarm), click the Card or Key radio button to specify how to
arm or disarm zones, and then press OK. For more information
about arming or disarming zones, see section 3.5.2.5.
5. Press Save to add the devices to the list.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
53
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.5.2.3
Configure zone inputs
When adding devices to an alarm or fire alarm zone, you must also
configure the zone inputs. To configure inputs,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of a zone.
3. In the Zone tab, at the bottom of the Device List, click Add Input. This
will open the Add Zone Inputs window.
4. Type a name for the input in the Name field.
5. Select a device from the drop-down list.
6. Select one of the available inputs by clicking the checkbox next to the
appropriate input.
7. Select the normal position of the input (N/O-normally open or N/Cnormally closed).
8. Set the duration (in milliseconds) of the input signal.
9. Click OK to add the input to the Input List.
3.5.2.4
Configure alarm actions and outputs
Configure alarm actions to specify what alerts to receive, if any, and
which ports and relays to use for alarm outputs. The Alarm tab (in the
Zone pane) offers the following options for all zones except access zones.
For more information about alarms, see sections 3.5.2.5 and 3.10.
• Program Sound - set a sound to be emitted by the software (at the
host computer or BioStar Server). To add custom sounds, see section
3.10.1.2.
•
Device Sound - set a sound to be emitted by a particular device.
•
Send Email - create an email alert to send when an alarm is activated
and select recipients or email alerts. For more information about email
alerts, see section 3.10.2.
•
Output Device - specify a device that will send an alarm signal to an
external device, such as an alarm siren.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
54
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Output Port - specify the port to use for an output signal.
•
Output Signal - specify a type of output signal.
3.5.2.5
Configure arm and disarm settings
After adding an alarm zone, you can configure the actions that will arm
and disarm the zone. To configure arm and disarm settings,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of an alarm zone. If necessary,
expand the Zone tree first.
3. Click the Details tab in the Zone pane.
4. Click Setup to the right of Arm/Disarm Type. This will open the
Arm/Disarm Setting window.
5. To configure cards for arming or disarming zones:
a. Select a device from the Read Device drop-down list.
b. Click Read Card. The LED on the device you selected will begin to
flash.
c. Place the card on the device.
d. When the card has been read, click Add. The card can now be
used to arm or disarm devices in the alarm zone.
6. To configure device keys for arming or disarming zones (BioStation
devices only):
a. Select a key that will arm devices from the first drop-down list.
b. Select a key that will disarm devices from the second drop-down
list.
7. When you are finished configuring the arm and disarm settings, click
OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
55
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.5.2.6
Configure external input/output settings
Instead of manually arming or disarming alarm zones, you can configure
the BioStar system to automatically determine when to arm or disarm
alarm zones based on the status of a specified input. You can also prevent
the BioStar system from arming an alarm zone when a monitored input is
in a not-ready position. Finally, you can configure the system to send a
specified signal to an external output when it arms or disarms alarm
zones. External input/output settings are available in BioStation V1.8,
BioEntry Plus V1.4, BioEntry W V1.0, BioLite Net V1.2, Xpass and Xpass
Slim V1.0,
D-Station V1.0, X-Station V1.0, BioStation T2 and FaceStation V1.0 or
higher.
To configure external input/output settings,
1. Click Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click the name of an alarm zone. If necessary,
expand the Zone tree first.
3. Click the Details tab in the Zone pane.
4. Click Setup to the right of External Input/Out. This will open the
External I/O Setting window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
56
3. Setup the BioStar System
5. Configure the following input/output settings as desired:

To prevent the BioStar system from arming an alarm zone:
a. Under External Sensor Status, select a device from the Device
drop-down list.
b. Select an input from the Input drop-down list.
c. Select the position of the input (N/O – normally open or N/C –
normally closed) that will prevent the system from arming the
alarm zone.

To allow the BioStar system to automatically arm or disarm an
alarm zone:
a. Under External Arm/Disarm, select a device from the Device
drop-down list.
b. Select an input from the Input drop-down list.
c. Select the position of the input (N/O – normally open or N/C –
normally closed) that will allow the system to arm the alarm
zone. The other position will allow the system to disarm the
alarm zone.

To send an arm signal to an external device, such as an alarm
signal:
a. Under Arm Status, select a device from the Device drop-down
list.
b. Select a relay from the Relay drop-down list.
c. Select a type of signal from the Signal drop-down list.
d. Specify a priority level in the Priority field.

To send a disarm signal to an external device, such as an alarm
signal:
a. Under Disarm Status, select a device from the Device dropdown list.
b. Select a relay from the Relay drop-down list.
c. Select a type of signal from the Signal drop-down list.
d. Specify a priority level in the Priority field.
6. When you are finished configuring the external input/output settings,
click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
57
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.5.2.7
Select access groups
The Access Group tab (in the Zone pane) allows you to specify access
groups that can bypass the normal restrictions set for the zone. For
example, you may choose a particular access group to be exempt from the
restrictions of an anti-passback zone. For alarm zones, this tab allows you
to specify access groups that can arm and disarm alarms. To select an
access group, click the checkbox next to a group name and then click
Apply.
3.5.2.8
View zone events
The Event tab (in the Zone pane) provides a listing of log events for a
particular zone. You can set a date range with the drop-down calendars
and view a report of events by clicking Get Log. For more information
about monitoring and viewing event logs, see section 4.1.
3.6
Setup Users
You will need to use a fingerprint scanner to capture each user's fingerprints. For
this reason, it may be helpful to have a terminal connected to the system at a
registration center, such as a human resources or security office. BioStation,
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, BioLite Net, or D-Station devices can be used for
fingerprint scanning when networked to the BioStar server, or the BioMini USB
device can be connected directly to a BioStar client to provide convenient
fingerprint scanning at a registration location.
When adding users, you will first need to create a user account. Once the account
has been created, you can register fingerprints and access cards or edit user
details as desired.
3.6.1
Create a User Account
User data is controlled via a user account. You can create new accounts for users
or retrieve user data from a device. To retrieve user data from a device, see section
3.6.5.3. To migrate user data from an existing BioAdmin database, see section 2.4.
To create new user accounts,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
58
3. Setup the BioStar System
2. In the navigation pane, right-click User or a department name and click Add
User. This will open a User pane similar to the one below.
3. Add details of the user's account in the User pane:
• Name - enter the user’s name.
•
Department - enter a department or click the ellipsis button (...) to select
from departments you have added to the BioStar system.
•
Telephone - enter the user’s telephone number (digits only—no characters
are allowed in this field).
•
E-mail - enter the user’s email address.
•
Password - enter the user’s password, if desired.
Note: Passwords saved in FaceStation devices are not compatible with
other devices. When transferring data from a FaceStation device to another
type of device, you must create new passwords for the other device.
•
Admin Level - select the user’s BioStar administration level (Normal User
or Admin User).
•
ID - enter an identification number for the user.
•
Start Date - set a beginning date that the user can obtain authorization
via the BioStar system.
•
Expiry Date - set a date that the user's account will expire (you can also
specify the hour that the account will expire).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
59
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Title - select a title for the user (Guest, President, Director, General
Manager, Chief, Assistant Manager, or custom title).
•
Mobile - enter a mobile telephone number for the user.
•
Genders - select the user's gender.
•
Date of Birth - select the user's date of birth from the drop-down calendar.
Note: You can add a photo of the user or a private message by clicking Modify
Private Information.
4. Register fingerprints (see section 3.6.2), face images (see section 3.6.3), and
access cards (see section 3.6.4) as necessary.
5. When you are finished adding details to the user’s account, click Apply.
3.6.2
Register Fingerprints
BioStar provides an option for encrypting fingerprint templates. If you choose to
use this option, you should set the encryption before capturing fingerprint scans.
Any previously-captured fingerprint templates will be rendered unusable when
you activate the encryption. For more information about encrypting fingerprints,
see section 4.7.
When registering fingerprints, it is important to capture quality images. Before
registering fingerprints, ensure that the candidate's fingers are clean and dry. You
may need to ask the candidate to clean his or her fingers just prior to registration.
If a candidate has excessively dry skin, ask him or her to moisten the fingertips
slightly by breathing warm air on them just prior to registration.
When registering fingerprints, keep the following tips in mind:
• You must register the same finger twice (two templates). You can register a
total of two fingers (a total of four templates) per user.
• Fingers with scars, worn fingerprints, or other physical damage may be poor
choices for registration.
• It may be necessary to delete and recapture an image of a fingerprint if the
candidate experiences low acceptance rates.
3.6.2.1
Place fingers on the sensor
To ensure good quality fingerprints, candidates must place as much of the
finger pad (the soft part opposite the fingernail) on the sensor as possible.
Suprema recommends using index or middle fingers, because they are
typically easier for users to correctly place on the sensor. To properly
place a finger on the sensor, candidates should lay the finger flat, so that
the pad side covers most of the sensor and the finger is nearly
perpendicular to the sensor.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
60
3. Setup the BioStar System
The image below illustrates both correct and incorrect placement of a
finger on the sensor.
3.6.2.2
Register fingerprints
BioStar allows you to register up to ten fingerprints per user. However,
some devices can only store a limited number of fingerprints:
•
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, and BioLite Net: up to two
•
BioStation: up to five
•
D-Station and BioStation T2: up to ten
When fingerprints are distributed from BioStar, the device will receive the
maximum number of fingerprints, beginning with the first stored
fingerprint scan.
If desired, one of the fingerprints can be used as a duress signal that will
trigger alarms when a candidate is forced to access an area. When
registering duress fingerprints, keep the following tips in mind:
• A duress finger cannot be used for normal access
•
The duress finger should appear to be a natural choice (i.e., the little
finger is an unusual choice and may indicate to a perpetrator that the
candidate is triggering an alarm)
•
Candidates should be educated about what occurs when the duress
finger is used (e.g., the duress finger may trigger automatic door locks
or silent alarms).
To register fingerprints,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
61
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. Click the Fingerprints tab in the User pane.
4. Select the enrollment device you will use for scanning fingerprints
from the drop-down list.
5. Select a security level from the next drop-down list.
6. Click Add at the bottom right of the User pane to create an empty slot
for registering a fingerprint.
7. In an empty finger slot, press Scan and then have the user place his
or her finger on the scanner twice, as prompted by the BioStar
interface.
8. If desired, click the checkbox next to the Duress option to set this
fingerprint as the duress signal.
9. Repeat steps 6-8 to register the rest of fingerprints.
10. Click Apply to save your changes.
3.6.2.3
Enroll users via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can enroll users directly from a
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, or Xpass device. For more information about
issuing command cards, see section 3.2.5.1 and 3.2.7.1.
To enroll a user on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via a command
card,
1. Place an enroll card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her
fingerprint to continue.
3. To capture only fingerprints, have the user place his or her finger on
the scanner two times (as prompted by the device).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
62
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. To capture fingerprints and issue an access card, place the card on
the device first. Then, have the user place his or her finger on the
scanner two times (as prompted by the device).
To enroll a user on an Xpass device via a command card,
1. Place an enroll card (command card) on an Xpass device.
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her
access card on the device to continue.
3. Place the user’s access card on the device.
4. Place the enroll card again on the device to confirm the action.
3.6.3
Capture Face Images
With camera-equipped devices, such as the D-Station and FaceStation, you can
capture images of users’ faces and use those images for authentication via
BioStar’s face detection technology. BioStar matches a still image of the user’s
face during authentication with captured face images in the BioStar server
database. Face detection can be used simultaneously with fingerprint recognition
for highly secure biometric access control. For more information about face
detection settings, see section 5.4.3.
To capture face images with FaceSation devices,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3. Click the Face tab in the User pane.
4. Select the enrollment device you will use for capturing face images from the
drop-down list.
5. In the Face Template section, click Capture, and then have the user align his
or her face with the camera, as prompted by the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
63
3. Setup the BioStar System
6. If desired, click Use Profile Img to use the image assigned to the user’s profile
instead of capturing a new image.
7. Click Apply to save your changes.
To capture face images with D-Station devices,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3. Click the Face (Fusion) tab in the User pane.
4. Select the enrollment device you will use for capturing face images from the
drop-down list.
5. In the 1st Face section, click Capture, and then have the user align his or her
face with the camera, as prompted by the device.
6. If desired, click Use Profile Img to use the image assigned to the user’s profile
instead of capturing a new image.
7. Repeat steps 5-7 in the 2nd Face and 3rd Face sections to capture additional
face images.
8. Click Apply to save your changes.
3.6.4
Issue Access Cards
Suprema manufactures access control devices that support multiple types of
access cards, as listed below:
•
EM4100: BioStation, BioEntry Plus, and BioLite Net
•
MIFARE®: BioStation Mifare, BioEntry Plus Mifare, BioEntry W Mifare, BioLite
Net, D-Station, and FaceStation
•
iCLASS®: BioEntry Plus iCLASS
•
FeliCa®: BioEntry Plus iCLASS
•
HID proximity: BioStation HID and BioEntry Plus HID
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
64
3. Setup the BioStar System
EM4100 and HID cards require only a card ID to complete card registration, while
MIFARE and iCLASS cards support two operation modes: Card Serial Number
(CSN) and Template-on-Card modes. FeliCa cards support only the CSN mode.
When using the CSN mode, you can read the serial number just as you would for
an EM4100 or HID card. When using Template-on-Card mode, you must record
the user information, including fingerprint templates, directly to the card.
Follow the procedures below to issue the appropriate type of card and then add it
to the user's account.
3.6.4.1
Issue EM4100 cards
To register a card for a user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3. In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4. Select a “EM4100” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5. Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management
window.
6. Select a Device ID from the drop-down list.
7. Enter a card ID (32 bits) and custom ID (8 bits) either manually or by
reading from the card (you can also click Use User ID to insert the
user’s ID in these fields):
• To enter the data manually, type the card ID and custom ID in the
corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
•
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the
device you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on
the device. After the card has been read, click OK.
8. Click Apply to save the card to the user's account.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
65
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.2
Issue HID proximity cards
To register a card for a user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3. In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4. Select “HID Prox” from the Card Type drop-down list.
5. Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management
window.
6. Select a Device ID from the drop-down list.
7. Enter a card ID and facility code (FC) either manually or by reading
from the card (you can also click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID
in these fields):
• To enter the data manually, type the ID and facility code in the
corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
•
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the
device you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on
the device. After the card has been read, click OK.
8. Click Apply to save the card to the user's account.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
66
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.3
Issue MIFARE or iCLASS CSN cards
MIFARE and iCLASS CSN cards work much like EM4100 and HID cards,
in that they store an uneditable card serial number (CSN) for a user. To
register a card for a user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3. In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4. Select “Mifare CSN” or “iCLASS CSN” from the Card Type drop-down
list.
5. Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management
window.
6. Select a Device ID from the drop-down list.
7. Enter a card ID either manually or by reading from the card (you can
also click Use User ID to insert the user’s ID in these fields):
• To enter the data manually, type the ID and facility code in the
corresponding fields, click OK, and then skip to step 8.
•
To read the data from the card, click Read Card (the LED on the
device you selected will begin flashing) and then place the card on
the device. After the card has been read, click OK.
8. Click Apply to issue the card to the user's account.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
67
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.4
Issue MIFARE or iCLASS template cards
MIFARE and iCLASS template cards allow you to store user information
and fingerprint templates directly on the card. To register a card for a
user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user's name.
3. In the User pane, click the Card tab.
4. Select “Mifare Template” or “iCLASS Template” from the drop-down list.
5. Click Card Management. This will open the Card Management
window.
6. Select a Device ID or USB MIFARE device (if connected) from the dropdown list.
7. If desired, click Bypass Card to allow the user to bypass the
fingerprint authentication.
8. Click Read Card. The LED on the device that you selected will begin
flashing.
9. Place the card on the device.
10. After the card is read, click OK.
11. Click Apply to issue the card to the user's account.
Note: iCLASS 2000, 2002 and 2004 cards are not supported as template cards.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
68
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.5
Change the MIFARE or iCLASS site key
Data encryption for MIFARE and iCLASS cards is governed by a 48-bit
site key. Only those cards with appropriate site keys can be read by
connected devices. BioStar allows you to define up to two MIFARE and
iCLASS site keys (primary and secondary), so that you can change the site
key for existing cards.
Note: Site keys must be carefully guarded. If the site key is revealed, your
security system can be bypassed.
To change the MIFARE or iCLASS site key,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Mifare Card or iCLASS Card >
Mifare Sitekey or iCLASS Sitekey . This will open the Mifare
Sitekey or iCLASS Sitekey window.
2. Enter a new primary key in the New Primary Key field.
3. Enter the key again in the Retype Primary Key field.
4. Click the Use radio button to activate the secondary key function. This
allows cards with the old site key to be read and rewritten with the
new key:
a. Enter the old site key in the New Secondary Key field.
b. Enter the old site key again in the Retype Secondary Key field.
5. When you are finished editing the site key, click OK.
Note: When all cards have been rewritten with the new site key, Suprema
advises disabling the secondary key function to prevent old cards from being
used for access.
3.6.4.6
Edit the MIFARE layout
BioStar allows you to customize the layout that is used to record user
information and fingerprint templates. This layout will be applied to all
new MIFARE cards issued with the devices you specify (BioStation Mifare,
BioEntry Plus Mifare, BioEntry W Mifare, BioLite Net, D-Station, or
FaceStation devices).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
69
3. Setup the BioStar System
MIFARE 1K cards are organized into 16 sectors with 4 blocks of 16 bytes
each. MIFARE 4K cards are organized into 32 sectors with 4 blocks and 8
sectors with 16 blocks. The following constraints apply to the MIFARE
layout:
• The first sector (block 0 through block 3) is reserved and cannot be
used for other data.
•
The last block of each sector (blocks 3, 7, 11, and so on) is reserved
for site key information.
•
The card information sector (CIS) occupies three contiguous blocks
and should start at the first available block of a sector (blocks 4, 8, 12,
and so on).
•
There should be no overlap between each template’s data.
To edit the MIFARE layout,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Mifare Card > Mifare Layout.
This will open the Mifare Layout window.
2. Use the drop-down lists and input fields to configure the following
parameters of the MIFARE layout:
• CIS Index Block - select the block index to use for header
information (4, 8, 12, or 16).
•
Number of Templates - select the number of templates to include
in the layout (0 to 4).
•
Template Size - select the number of bytes to use in the template.
The default size is 334 bytes.
•
Template 1-4 Start Block - enter the starting block for each
fingerprint template.
3. To use the custom layout, click Apply to Devices and select the
appropriate device numbers from the Device Tree window.
4. To save your changes, click Save.
Note: To reset any changes you have made, click Default. To exit the
window without saving changes, click Close.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
70
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.4.7
Edit the iCLASS layout
BioStar allows you to customize the layout that is used to record user
information and fingerprint templates. This layout will be applied to all
new iCLASS cards issued with BioEntry Plus iCLASS devices.
BioEntry Plus iCLASS devices support 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k
Byte) iCLASS cards. The 16k bit (2k Byte) cards are available with either 2
or 16 application areas and are organized into 237 blocks of 8 bytes each.
The 32k bit (4k Byte) cards are available with either 2 or 16 application
areas, plus an additional 16k user configurable memory, and are
organized into 8 pages with 26 blocks of 8 bytes each.
To edit the iCLASS layout,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > iCLASS Card > iCLASS
Layout. This will open the iCLASS Layout window.
2.
Enter the following parameters of the iCLASS layout:
• CIS Index Block - select the block index to use for header
information (default value is 13).
•
Number of Templates - select the number of templates to include
in the layout (default is 2).
•
Template Size - select the number of bytes to use in the template.
The default size is 382 bytes.
•
Template 1-4 Start Block - enter the starting block for each
fingerprint template (Template 1 default value is 19; Template 2
default value is 67).
3. To use the custom layout, click Apply to Devices and select the
appropriate device numbers from the Device Tree window.
To save your changes, click Save.
Note: To reset any changes you have made, click Default. To exit the
window without saving changes, click Close.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
71
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.5
Transfer User Data
BioStar allows you to automatically transfer user information to devices, by
selecting the “Auto” setting from the menu bar (Option > User > Transfer Mode >
Auto). However, you can also manually transfer data to devices. When doing so,
you can either transfer selected users to selected devices or synchronize all users
at once. BioStar also allows you to retrieve data from a device and transfer it to
the BioStar server.
3.6.5.1
Transfer a user to a device
To transfer a single user or selected users to a device or devices,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Transfer Users to Device. This will open the
Select a Device window.
3. Select a device or devices from the list on the left by clicking the
checkboxes next to device names.
4. Click a user name (you can hold down the Ctrl key while selecting
multiple users).
5. If desired, click the checkbox to overwrite users with different
information.
6. Click Transfer to Device to send the user information to the
selected devices.
Note: You can also delete users from devices with this menu. This action cannot
be undone, so use this feature with caution. To delete users from a device, click a
user’s name and then click Delete Users.
!
When using Xpass or Xpass Slim devices as lift readers, transferring
settings to the device with the User menu will reset all of the settings
and user data stored on the device. To preserve the settings, use the
Transfer to Device function in the Lift menu instead.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
72
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.6.5.2
Synchronize all users
To synchronize all user information between the BioStar server and
connected devices,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Transfer Users to Device. This will open the
Select a Device window (see section 3.6.5.1).
3. Select a device or devices from the list on the left by clicking the
checkboxes next to device names.
4. Click Synchronize All Users.
3.6.5.3
Retrieve user data from a device
To retrieve data from a device,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Manage Users in Device. This will open the
Select Target Device window.
3. Click a device name in the list on the left to display user templates
contained in the device.
4. Click a user in the Template Information list (new users will be
highlighted in yellow).
5. Click Get From Device.
Note: You can also delete users from devices with this menu. This action cannot
be undone, so use this feature with caution. To delete users from a device, click a
user’s name and then click Delete (or click Delete All to delete all user records
at once).
In the template information, “Template Num” is the number of fingerprint
templates stored in the device and “Face Num” is the number of face templates
stored in the device. Face images captured on D-Station devices are not counted
in the “Template Num” total.
Caution: If there are the same users on the BioStar database when you retrieve
user data from Xpass devices, the data will be overwritten without fingerprint
data because Xpass devices do not store fingerprint data.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
73
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.7
Setup Timezones
In the BioStar system, timezones are used to schedule permissions and
restrictions. You can apply timezones to restrict the hours that a user is permitted
to access a door by combining doors and timezones in access groups (see section
3.8).
3.7.1
Create a Timezone
To create a timezone schedule,
1. Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click New Timezone.
3. Enter a name for the timezone.
4. In the Timezone pane, create a weekly schedule by highlighting the effective
hours for each day. You can copy a schedule from one day to the next by
clicking the arrow to the right of the day.
5. If desired, you can add up to two holiday schedules to the timezone. To create
holiday schedules, see section 3.7.2.
6. When you are finished creating the timezone, click Apply.
7. Next, transfer the timezone data to devices:
a. In the task pane, click Transfer to Device. This will open the Device Tree
window.
b. Select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes in the Device Tree
window.
d. Click OK.
You can now combine the timezone with door permissions to create an access
group (see section 3.8).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
74
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.7.2
Create a Holiday Schedule
To create a holiday schedule,
1. Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click New Holiday.
3. Enter a name for the holiday.
4. In the Holiday pane, set the date the holiday begins with the drop-down
calendar.
5. If the holiday recurs every year, click the checkbox below the drop-down list.
6. Set the duration of the holiday (in days).
7. Click Add to add the holiday to the list.
8. Click Apply.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
75
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.8
Setup Access Groups
Access groups allow you to define sets of access permissions that can include
doors, users, and timezones. Before adding an access group, you must setup
doors (see section 3.3) and timezones (see section 3.7). After creating access
groups, you must manually transfer the data to affected devices (see section 3.8.4).
3.8.1
Add an Access Group
To add an access group,
1. Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click New Access Group.
3. Type a name for the new access group in the box that appears in the
navigation pane and press Enter.
4. In the Access Control tab (in the Access Group pane), click Add. This will open
the Access Group window.
5. Select doors to add to the group by clicking the checkboxes next to door
groups or individual doors.
6. Select a timezone to apply to the group from the drop-down list at the bottom
of the window.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary to add multiple sets of doors and timezones
to the access group.
8. Click OK to add your selections to the group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
76
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.8.2
Add Users to Access Groups
After adding access group, you must add users to the group. You can add users to
access groups from the User tab, as described below or by assigning access
groups to a user from the User pane, as described in 3.8.3. You can assign a user
to a maximum of four access groups.
To add users to access groups,
1. Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2. From the User tab (in the Access Group pane), click Add.
3. In the Add New User window, select users to add to the group by checking
user groups or individual users.
4. Click OK.
If you have setup user groups, users will appear under their respective groups.
3.8.3
Assign Access Groups to Users
You can also define which access groups a user will belong to (up to four total)
from the User pane. To assign an access group to a user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user’s name.
3. Click the Access Control tab in the User pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
77
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Click Add. This will open the User Access Group window.
5. Click the name of an access group from the list on the left and then click >.
6. Repeat step 5 as needed to assign additional access groups.
7. When you are finished assigning access groups, click OK.
3.8.4
Transfer Access Groups to Devices
To transfer access group data to devices,
1. Click Access Control in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Transfer to Device. This will open the Device Tree
window.
3. Select a device or devices by clicking the checkboxes in the Device Tree
window.
4. Click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
78
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9
Setup Time and Attendance
BioStar’s time and attendance features allow you to define time categories, shifts,
and holiday rules. Refer to the procedures in this section as well as the steps in
section 3.7.2 to configure time and attendance options.
3.9.1
Add a Time Category
To add a time category,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Add Time Category. This will open a Time Category
pane similar to the one below.
3. Enter a name and description for the time category.
4. Add details for the time category:
• Time Rate - enter the rate at which time is calculated for this time
category.
•
Rounding Unit(Min) - specify in minutes how to round a user’s work time
(for example, a entry of “5” will round a user’s work time to the nearest 5minute decrement).
•
Display Color - set how the time category will appear in the daily schedule.
5. Click Apply to save the time category.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
79
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9.2
Add a Daily Schedule
BioStar versions 1.35 and higher support a maximum of 256 daily schedules. To
add a daily schedule,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Add Daily Schedule. This will open a Daily Schedule
pane similar to the one below.
3. Enter a name and description for the daily schedule.
4. Set the start time for the daily schedule and, if desired, click the checkbox to
the right to let the BioStar to record workers’ first come-in and last go-out
activities via the BioStar system as their check-in and check-out activities for
the day.
5. Define the daily schedule by adding one or more time slots:
a. Specify the details for the time slot:
• Start time - set the beginning time for the time slot. If the time slot
begins in the following calendar day, click the checkbox (“Next”) to the
right.
•
End time - set the ending time for the time slot. If the time slot ends in
the following calendar day, click the checkbox (“Next”) to the right.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
80
3. Setup the BioStar System
•
Time Category - select one a time category from the drop-down list.
See section 3.9.1 to define the time categories that will appear in this
list.
•
Minimum Duration - set the minimum duration for the time slot (in
minutes). Workers must be checked in for at least the minimum
duration, or the system will record no time worked for the time slot.
•
Grace (Start) - activate and set a grace period for checking in late at
the beginning of the time slot (in minutes). Click the checkbox to
enable the grace period and then specify the length of the grace period
in the corresponding field. Workers who check in within the grace
period will be considered to have checked in right at the start of the
time slot.
•
Grace (End) - activate and set a grace period for checking out early at
the end of the time slot (in minutes). Click the checkbox to enable the
grace period and then specify the length of the grace period in the
corresponding field. Workers who check out within the grace period will
be considered to checked out right at the end of the time slot.
•
Rounding (In) - specify in minutes how to round a user’s check-in time
(for example, a entry of “5” will round a user’s time to the nearest 5minute decrement).
•
Rounding (Out) - specify in minutes how to round a user’s check-out
time (for example, an entry of “5” will round a user’s time to the
nearest 5-minute decrement).
•
Auto Check IN - enable or disable this feature to automatically checkin a user who has failed to check-in for the time slot.
•
Auto Check OUT - enable or disable this feature to automatically
check-out a user who has failed to check-out for the time slot.
•
Affect Result - allow or disallow data from this time slot to be used to
determine overall time and attendance result per one daily schedule.
b. Click Add to add the time slot to the daily schedule.
6. Click Apply to save the daily schedule.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
81
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9.3
Add a Shift
To add a shift,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Add Shift. This will open a Shift pane similar to the one
below.
3. Click one of the radio buttons to set the shift as a part of a daily or weekly
cycle. If you select “weekly,” a calendar week will constitute a cycle. If you
select “daily,” you can specify any number of consecutive days (e.g., 5, 10, or
20 days) to constitute a cycle.
Note: Daily cycle is available only with the Standard Edition of BioStar.
4. Select start and end dates from the drop-down calendars.
5. Activate days of the cycle by clicking the checkboxes on the left.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
82
3. Setup the BioStar System
6. Click the ellipsis button (...) to select a daily schedule. This will open the T&A
Tree window. See section 3.9.2 to define the daily schedules that will appear in
this window.
7. Select a daily schedule and click OK to apply the daily schedule to the shift.
8. Repeat steps 5-7 as needed.
Note: You can copy a schedule from one day to the next by clicking the arrow to the
right of the day.
9. Click Apply to save the shift.
3.9.4
Assign Users to Shifts
Assign users to shifts to enable BioStar to record time and attendance data. You
can assign individual users to shifts via the User pane or assign multiple users to
a shift via the Time and Attendance pane.
To assign individual users to shifts via the User pane,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user name.
3. In the User pane, click the T&A tab.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
83
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Click the radio button next to Shift Management and then click Add at the
bottom of the User pane. This will open the T&A Tree window.
5. Select a shift and click OK.
6. Click Apply to save the T&A settings for the user.
To assign multiple users to a shift via the Time and Attendance pane,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a shift name.
3. In the Shift pane, click the User tab and then click Add at the bottom of the
pane. This will open the Add New User window.
4. Select one or more users and click OK.
5. Click Apply to save the T&A settings for the shift.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
84
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.9.5
Add a Holiday Rule
To add a holiday rule,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Holiday Management. This will open the Holiday Rules
window.
3. Click New Holiday Rule.
4. Enter a name for the rule.
5. Click Add. This will open the T&A Tree window.
6. Select a holiday from the list and click OK. To define a holiday, see section
3.7.2.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
85
3. Setup the BioStar System
7. Click one of the radio buttons at the bottom of the Holiday Rules window to
specify how the holiday should affect time and attendance schedules:
• Regard as in a non-working day - time worked on this day is not recorded
and does not appear on T&A reports.
•
Regard as in a normal shift - time worked on this day is recorded and
calculated as in a normal shift.
•
Apply a new daily schedule - time worked on this day is recorded and
calculated per a selected daily schedule.
8. If you chose to apply a new daily schedule, click the ellipsis button (...) to
select a schedule. See 3.9.2 to create daily schedules.
9. Click Apply to save the holiday rule.
3.9.6
Add a Leave Period
Add leave periods to define times when workers are scheduled to be out of the
office, but should still be considered to be working, such as paid vacation or
business trips. To include a user’s scheduled vacation or leave time in the time
and attendance settings,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the User pane, click the T&A tab.
3. Click the radio button next to Leave Management and then click Add. This will
open the Add Leave window.
4. Enter a name for the leave period, if desired.
5. Select a leave type from the first drop-down list.
6. Enter the start and end dates for the leave by clicking the drop-down
calendars.
7. Click OK to add the leave period to the user’s T&A settings.
8. Click Apply to save the user’s T&A settings.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
86
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.10 Setup Alarms
BioStar can provide multiple levels of alarm notification. The system can activate
system alarms by emitting sounds from devices and connected computers. The
system can also be configured to send email notifications to specified recipients.
In addition, you can configure the system to receive inputs from external devices
(such as fire warning devices) or send outputs to external devices (such as alarm
sirens).
3.10.1 Configure Alarm Settings and Sounds
BioStar allows you to customize how the system responds to events. You can
configure alarm settings by creating customized priority levels and selecting the
action to take when an event occurs. You can also add your own alarm sounds to
further customize the system.
3.10.1.1 Customize alarm actions
To customize alarm actions,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Event > Alarm Setting.
This will open the Alarm Setting window.
2. Select a priority level from the drop-down list and click Add. This will
open a list of events.
3. Select the events to include in the priority level and click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
87
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Select an action or actions by clicking the checkboxes on the right.
• If you select Program Sound, choose a sound from the drop-down
list and then specify the duration (“play count”) of the sound in
seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0, the specified sound will
play until someone with administrative privileges manually stops
the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab in the Monitoring pane.
To add custom sounds to the list, see section 3.10.1.2.
•
If you select Send Email, click the ellipsis button (…) to the right to
select an email recipient. To configure email notifications, see
section 3.10.2.
•
Selecting Acknowledge will activate pop-up alerts on client PCs.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 as desired to customize other priority levels.
6. When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.1.2 Add custom alarm sounds
To add custom alarm sounds,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Event > Sound Setting. This
will open the Sound Setting window.
2. Click Add.
3. Locate a waveform (.wav) file on your computer or network and click
Open.
4. If desired, click a sound and then click Play to hear the sound.
5. When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.2 Configure email notifications
BioStar can send email notifications when an alarm event occurs (not available in
the free version). As explained in 3.10.1.1, you can customize which events will
trigger an automatic email alert. To configure an email notification,
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
88
3. Setup the BioStar System
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Event > E-mail Setting. This will open
the Email Setting window.
2. Type the email address, SMTP server, port number, SMTP ID, and SMTP
password in the Sender Info section.
3. Type the email address in the Recipient Info section.
4. Click Add to add the configuration to the list.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 as necessary to add other email configurations.
6. When you are finished, click Save.
3.10.3 Configure Settings for External Devices
When using external devices with BioStar, you must configure settings to
determine what actions will occur in response to input signals. For more
information about configuring devices and device settings, see sections 3.2 and
5.1.
3.10.3.1 Configure outputs to external devices
You may choose to have certain devices send signals to external devices,
such as alarm sirens, when selected events occur. To configure outputs,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3. In the Device pane, click the Output tab.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
89
3. Setup the BioStar System
4. Click Add at the bottom of the pane. This will open the Output Setting
window.
5. Configure actions that will activate (send a signal to) a specified
output relay:
a. In the Alarm On Event section, select an event from the first dropdown list.
b. Select the device number or All Device from the second drop-down
list.
c. Select a signal setting from the third drop-down list.
d. Enter a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
e. Click Add.
6. Configure actions that will turn off (stop sending a signal to) an
activated output relay:
a. In the Alarm Off Event section, select an event from the first dropdown list.
b. Select the device number or All Device from the second drop-down
list.
c. Enter a priority for the event.
d. Click Add.
7. When you are finished, click Save.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
90
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.10.3.2 Configure inputs from external devices
To integrate BioStar's door control with other alarm systems, such as fire
warning systems, you can specify the actions BioStar will take when
receiving an input. You can also configure inputs to work with manual
door releases (exit buttons) and other types of external devices. To
configure inputs,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a device name.
3. In the Device pane, click the Input tab.
4. Click Add at the bottom of the pane. This will open the Input Setting
window.
5. Select an input port from the second drop-down list.
6. Select the normal position of the input switch (N/O-normally open or
N/C-normally closed).
7. Select a function for the input (Not Use, Generic Input, Emergency
Open, Release All Alarms, Restart Device, or Disable Device).
8. Select a schedule for applying the function (Always, Disable, or
custom schedules).
9. Set the minimum duration (in milliseconds) an input signal must last
to trigger the specified action.
10. Click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
91
3. Setup the BioStar System
3.11 Setup Cameras
This section describes how to add IP cameras and network video recorder (NVR)
servers to the Biostar system. Once you have properly set up the IP cameras and
NVR servers, you can monitor areas in real time and view event logs with still
images or recorded videos. BioStar supports the following IP cameras and NVR
servers:
Internet Protocol (IP) Camera
Model Name
Developer
AXIS PTZ 215
AXIS
AXIS M3203-V
AXIS
SNP-3120VH
Samsung Techwin
AXIS Camera Station
AXIS
NET-I Ware
Samsung Techwin
Network Video Recorder (NVR) Server
3.11.1 Add an NVR Server
Network video recorder (NVR) servers store video streams transferred from all
connected cameras and allow you to view the videos when you check event logs.
To add an NVR server to the BioStar system,
1. Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2. Click Setup Camera in the Task pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
92
3. Setup the BioStar System
3. In the Task pane, click Add New Camera Server.
This will open a Camera (Setup Mode) pane similar to the one below.
4. In the Basic Information section, enter a name, type, model, IP address, and
port number for the NVR server, and then enter the BioStar user name and
password required to access the NVR server.
5. Click Detect to view cameras that are currently connected to the NVR server.
6. Click Apply at the bottom right of the Camera (Setup Mode) pane. This will
add the detected cameras under the NVR server in the navigation pane, as
illustrated below.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
93
3. Setup the BioStar System
7. In the navigation pane, click a camera name. This will open the Camera (Setup
Mode) pane.
8 . Click Add at the bottom right of the Device List to open the Device Tree
window.
9. Click a checkbox next to a device name, and then click OK.
10. Click Apply at the bottom right to apply the changes to the BioStar system.
3.11.2 Add an IP Camera
BioStar allows you to add an IP camera, assoicate it with an access control device,
and specify the events that will trigger the IP camera to send captured still images
to the BioStar system.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
94
3. Setup the BioStar System
To add an IP camera to the BioStar system,
1. Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2. Click Setup Camera in the Task pane (if desired).
3. In the Task pane, click Add New Camera. This will open a Camera (Setup
Mode) pane similar to the one below.
4. In the Basic Information section, enter a name, type, model, IP address, and
port number for the IP camera and enter a user name and password for the
BioStar to acess the IP camera.
5. In the Details tab, click Add at the bottom right of the Device List section to
open the Device Tree window.
6 Select a device to associate the IP camera with and click OK.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
95
3. Setup the BioStar System
7. Click Add at the bottom right of the Event List section and select an event that
will trigger the IP camera to send a captured still image to the BioStar system.
8. Click Apply at the bottom right to apply the changes to the BioStar system.
3.11.3 Configure an IP Camera
BioStar can control the movement of pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras. When you use
an IP camera that supports the PTZ feature, you can aim it at a spot you want to
surveil.
To control the movement of a PTZ camera,
1. Click Device in the shortcut pane.
2. Click a PTZ camera in the navigation pane.
3. In the Camera (Setup Mode) pane, click the Setup tab.
4. Use the controls in the Pan & Tilt and the Zoom sections to aim the PTZ
camera at the desired spot.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
96
04
Manage the BioStar
System
Once you have properly set up the BioStar system, management is fairly simple. BioStar
allows you to monitor events in real-time and view event logs by date, control parts of the
system remotely, manage users, and upgrade device firmware directly from the BioStar
interface. In addition, you can activate fingerprint encryption, if necessary, to provide an
additional level of security and privacy.
4.1
Monitor Events in Real Time
The BioStar system records events from all connected devices. To monitor events in real
time, click Monitoring in the shortcut pane, then click the Realtime Monitoring tab.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
97
4. Manage the BioStar System
•
This tab shows all events that have occurred since you last logged into the system.
The tab shows the current monitoring status (Monitoring Started or Monitoring
Paused) and includes buttons for starting (play) or stopping (pause) real-time
monitoring. The sound bar icon on the right shows whether an alarm sound is
currently playing (green bars) or not (grey bars). To stop an alarm sound, click the
sound bars icon.
•
BioStar displays the following camera icons at the front of the event logs:
Icon
Description
The event log includes a still image. Click the event log to view the image.
The event log includes a video. Double-click the event log to view the video.
When both camera icons are displayed, single-click the icon to view the still image
and double-click the icon to view the recorded video. When you double-click the
video icon, a video playback window will appear that is similar to the one below.
Coupled with the face detection features of D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2, or
FaceStation, administrators can verify users’ identity by clicking Show Image (to view the
user’s stored face image) and Auto Image Reflect (to view the most recent face image
captured by the local device). Clicking Show Image also opens a window at the bottom
where the user image will be displayed. Click Real Size to view the full-sized (640 x 480)
stored image, instead of a thumbnail version and click Show Popup to open the image in a
new window that can be repositioned on the screen.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
98
4. Manage the BioStar System
To see a users’ photos upon successful authentication events, click Option > Event >
Profile Image Setting in the menu bar, select event types, and then click the checkbox
next to Show Image Profile. The user’s image will appear on the realtime monitoring tab
when he or she successfully completes one of the authentication events specified in the
Profile Image Setting window.
As of BioStar V1.3, administrators can monitor users’ locations and authentication status
via a Roll Call (muster) feature. This feature allows administrators to determine whether
users are present, missing, or have gained entry to areas for which they are not authorized.
4.1.1
Monitor Muster Zones in Real Time
BioStar allows you to monitor and track employees during an emergency and
determine whether or not all employees have reported to the muster area.
To monitor and track employees,
1. Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2. Click a muster zone in the Monitoring pane.
3. In the Task pane, click Roll Call. This will open the Roll Call window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
99
4. Manage the BioStar System
4. Click View Report to open the Roll Call Report.
To save the report data as a comma delimited file, click Save as CSV. To print the
report, click the printer icon. To export the report, click the export icon.
4.1.2
Monitor Areas with Cameras in Real Time
BioStar allows you to monitor specified areas with the connected camera in real
time.
To monitor specified areas in real time,
1. Click Camera in the shortcut pane.
2. Click Monitor Camera in the Task pane (if desired).
3. Click a camera in the navigation pane.
4.2
View Event Logs
BioStar allows you to view event logs for users, doors, and zones. You can access
pre-defined logs from the Event tabs in user, door, and zone panes or view access
logs from the Administrator menu. You can also use the Log List tab in the
Monitoring pane to specify log parameters.
BioStar automatically collects log information from connected devices as long as
the server is running. However, if you have devices that are not connected to the
BioStar server, you must manually upload logs before viewing them.
100
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.2.1
Upload Logs to BioStar
For devices that are not connected to the BioStar server, you must manually
upload logs before viewing them.
To upload logs to BioStar,
1. Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2. Click the Log List tab in the Monitoring pane.
3. In the Task pane, click Upload Log. This will open the Upload Log window.
4. Select an upload option by clicking the corresponding box:
a. Upload Log - Use this option to upload logs for a specific time period.
Specify the period with the drop-down calendars.
b. Upload All Log - Use this option to upload all logs.
c. Get Recent Log - Use this option to upload logs written since the
previous upload.
5. Select the devices from which to upload logs by clicking the checkboxes next to
the device numbers.
6. Click OK. BioStar will download log records from the selected devices and
display the activities in the log list.
4.2.2
View Logs in User, Door, and Zone Panes
To view pre-defined logs,
1. Click User or Doors in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, click a user, door, or zone name.
3. In the User, Doors, or Zone panes, click the Event tab.
4. Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down
calendars.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
101
4. Manage the BioStar System
5. Click Get Log. This will generate a list of the relevant events for the period you
specified.
4.2.3
View Logs from the Monitoring Pane
To specify log filters or view logs for groups of users, doors, or zones,
1. Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2. In the Monitoring pane, click the Log List tab.
3. Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down
calendars.
4. Set the parameters to generate a log:
• To show events by alarm priority, click the Event checkbox and select an
event priority from the drop-down list. To add a new alarm priority, click
the ellipsis button (...) to open the Alarm Priority window.
•
To show events by user, click the User checkbox and then click the ellipsis
button (…) to select a user or users from the User/Department Tree
window. You can select all users by selecting the top level of the user tree.
•
To show events for a particular device, click the Device ID checkbox and
then click the ellipsis button (...) to select a device from the Device Tree
window. To show only network events for a device, you can also click the
Only Network History checkbox.
•
To show all events, leave all the checkboxes unchecked.
•
To show the user’s image at the bottom of the tab, click Show Image. For
more information about viewing user images, see section 4.1.
5. Click Get Log to display the events.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
102
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.2.4
View Access Logs
From the Administrator menu, you can view histories of system access and record
modification by type of user. To view access logs,
1. From the menu bar, click Administrator > Access Log. This will open the
Access Log window.
2. Click a radio button to select either administrators or users.
3. Set an event period (beginning and ending dates) with the drop-down
calendars.
4. Select a type of access or modification event with the Access drop-down list.
5. If desired, specify a particular admin or user by clicking the checkbox next to
the Admin ID, Admin IP, or User ID fields, and then entering the appropriate
identification.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
103
4. Manage the BioStar System
6. Click Get Log. This will generate a list of the relevant events for the period you
specified.
4.3
Monitor Door Events via a Visual Map
BioStar allows you to conveniently manage doors on a visual representation of
your actual floor plan. On the Visual Map, you can customize your floor plan, add
doors, and monitor door status and activity (for example, whether the door is
open or closed, authentication events, and door alarms). If you have more than
one floor plan, you can create additional Visual Maps for each floor. The Visual
Map feature is available only in the Standard Edition.
4.3.1
Create a Visual Map
In the setup mode, you can add the floor plan of your building and place doors. To
add the floor plan and place doors on the plan,
1. In the shortcut pane, click Visual Map.
2. In the task pane, click Setup Mode.
“Monitor Mode” will appear in the title bar of the Visual Map window.
3. In the task pane, click Add Visual Map. This will open a new Visual Map
window on the right.
4. In the Visual Map window, type a name for the new Visual Map.
5. At the bottom of the Visual Map window, click Set Background to add a floor
plan.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
104
4. Manage the BioStar System
The BioStar supports images larger than resolution 730x470 in jpg, bmp, gif,
or png format only.
6. Choose an image and click Open.
7. Click Add Door to add doors. This will open a window with a list of doors.
8. From the door list, click the checkboxes next to doors to add and click Apply.
Door icons will appear on the floor plan.
9. Click and drag the door icon to the desired location on the floor plan. You can
individually relocate a door icon or name by double-clicking the door icon or
name.
10. To remove a door from the floor plan, click the door and then click Remove
Door.
11. Repeat steps 7-10 as necessary to add additional doors.
12. When you are finished adding doors, click Apply.
Note: To remove all doors from the plan and start over, click Reset.
4.3.2
Monitor Doors on a Visual Map
In the monitor mode, you can view the status and activities for each door on the
visually enhanced map.
To monitor doors,
1. In the task pane, click Monitor Visual Map. “Monitor Mode” will appear in the
title bar of the Visual Map window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
105
4. Manage the BioStar System
2. Monitor door status and activities on the visual map, as represented by the
following icons. Door activities, such as successful authentication or alarms
will appear on the door icons:
Icon
Activity
Door is closed / Door alarm is clear
Door is open
Successful authentication while door is closed
Successful authentication while door is open
Failed authentication while door is closed
Failed authentication while door is open
Held or forced open door / Held or forced open door alarm
Note: Door icons will change only when door sensors have been assigned in the door
settigns and detect the door status. In other words, door icons change only when the
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
106
4. Manage the BioStar System
door actually opens or closes and not when you click Open Door or Close door. For
more information about door settings, see section 5.2.1.
3. To open or close a door, click a door and then click Open Door or Close Door.
4. To change settings for a door, click a door and then click Setup Door.
4.4
Control Doors, Alarms, and Devices Remotely
BioStar allows administrators or operators to control doors, alarms, and devices
remotely. You can open or close doors via a computer connected to the BioStar
system. You can also release (cancel) alarms remotely and lock or unlock devices.
4.4.1
Open or Close Doors
In some situations, an administrator or operator may need to open or close a door
remotely. To open or close doors,
1. Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2. The Door/Zone Monitoring tab lists door names and their statuses. To change
the status (open or closed) of a door, click the door name and then click either
Open Door or Close Door.
You can also open and close doors while monitoring a Visual Map. For more
information, see section 4.3.2.
4.4.2
Release Alarms
When an event triggers an alarm, administrators or operators can release the
alarm remotely. To release alarms,
1. Click Monitoring in the shortcut pane.
2. The Door/Zone Monitoring tab lists doors names and alarm events. To release
(cancel) an alarm, click the door name and then click Release Alarm.
4.4.3
Lock or Unlock Devices
BioStar allows you to lock and unlock devices to prevent unauthorized access
when BioStar is not running. This action blocks communication from devices. You
can either lock devices manually from the BioStar interface or automatically when
you exit the BioStar software. All connected devices can be simultaneously locked
or unlocked, but you cannot lock or unlock devices that are connected directly to
the BioStar server.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
107
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.4.3.1
Lock or unlock connected devices
To lock all connected devices, from the menu bar, click Option > Device
> Lock All Devices.
To unlock all connected devices,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Unlock All Devices.
2. If necessary, enter a password in the Enter Locking Password window
and click OK (if you have not created a locking password, simply click
OK). See section 4.4.3.2 to create a locking password.
4.4.3.2
Set automatic device locking
To set automatic device locking,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Automatic Locking.
This will open the Auto Locking window.
2. Click the first checkbox to lock all devices when exiting BioStar.
3. If desired, click the second checkbox to change the lock password:
a. Enter the old password
b. Enter the new password
c. Retype the new password to confirm.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
108
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.4.3.3
Reset a device lock
If you have forgotten the locking password for a device, Suprema’s
technical support team can send you an unlock code. To request the code,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Automatic Locking.
This will open the Auto Locking window.
2. Click the Initialize Password checkbox to activate the buttons at the
bottom of the window.
3. Click Get Challenge Code. This will open the Get Challenge Code
window.
4. Select the appropriate device from the drop-down list and click Get.
5. Click Save as File to save the challenge code to your computer.
6. Email the challenge code to Suprema ([email protected]).
Suprema’s technical support personnel will return an unlocking code
to you via email.
7. When you receive the code from Suprema, open the Auto Locking
window and activate the buttons (see steps 1-2).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
109
4. Manage the BioStar System
8. Click Unlock Device and Password to Default. This will open the
Write Challenge Code window.
9. Click Open Code File and locate the file sent to you by Suprema.
10. When you have opened the file, click Write. This will unlock the
device and reset the locking password to the default (no password).
4.5
Manage Users
With the BioStar system, you can delete users, transfer users to other
departments, and customize user information fields. You can also export or
import user data for creating custom reports, batch editing, or other needs.
4.5.1
Delete Users
If the occasion arises, you can easily remove users from the BioStar system. To
delete a user,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. Right-click a user's name.
3. Click Delete User.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
4.5.1.1
Delete an individual user via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can delete an individual user directly
from a BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, Xpass, or Xpass Slim device. For more
information about issuing command cards, see section 3.2.5.1 and
3.2.7.1.
To delete users directly from a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via
command cards,
1. Place a delete card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
110
4. Manage the BioStar System
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her
fingerprints to continue.
3. Place the user's access card on the device and then have the user
place his or her finger on the scanner (as prompted by the device).
To delete users directly from an Xpass or Xpass Slim device via command
cards,
1. Place a delete card (command card) on an Xpass or Xpass Slim device.
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her
access card on the device to continue.
3. Place the user's access card on the device.
4. Place the delete card on the device again to confirm the action.
4.5.1.2
Delete all users via command cards
After issuing command cards, you can delete all users directly from a
BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W, Xpass, or Xpass Slim device. For more
information about issuing command cards, see section 3.2.5.1 and
3.2.7.1.
To delete all users directly from a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device via
command cards,
1. Place a delete all card (command card) on a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry
W device.
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must scan his or her
fingerprints to continue.
3. Place the delete all card on the device again to confirm the action.
To delete all users directly from an Xpass or Xpass Slim device via
command cards,
1. Place a delete all card (command card) on an Xpass or Xpass Slim
device.
2. If authorization is required, an administrator must place his or her
access card on the device to continue.
3. Place the delete all card on the device again to confirm the action.
4.5.2
Transfer Users to Other Departments
BioStar makes moving users to other departments very simple. Before
transferring a user, you must create a department:
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the navigation pane, right-click User.
3. Click Add Department.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
111
4. Manage the BioStar System
4. Enter a name for the department.
To transfer users to a department, simply click and drag a user name onto a
department name.
4.5.3
Customize User Information Fields
BioStar allows you to customize user information fields. This can be useful for
altering the default information fields or for creating new fields.
4.5.3.1
Add new information fields
To add new information fields,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > User > Custom Field Setting.
This will open the Custom Fields Management window.
2. Select an order number from the first drop-down list (choose a number
that is not already in use).
3. Select a field type from the second drop-down list. To restrict the field
to numerical values, click the Only Digit checkbox.
4. Enter item data (for example, items to appear in a combo box) and a
name for the item.
5. Click Add.
6. Repeat steps 2-5 as desired to create additional information fields.
7. When you are finished, click Save.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
112
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.5.3.2
Modify existing information fields
To modify existing information fields,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > User > Custom Field Setting.
This will open the Custom Fields Management window (see section
4.5.3.1).
2. Click the item you want to modify in the list at the bottom. The data
will appear in the fields at the top of the window.
Note: Items 1-4 are required fields and cannot be modified or deleted.
3. Modify the data as desired.
4. Click Modify.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 as desired to modify additional information fields.
6. When you are finished, click Save.
4.5.4
Export User Data
Exported user data is formatted as a comma-delimited file (CSV), which can be
edited with a text editor or Microsoft Excel. To export user data,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Export User. This will open the Exporting window.
3. Select types of user data to export by clicking items in the list on the left and
then clicking >.
4. After selecting all the types of user data to export, click Next.
5. Type a path and filename for the user data or click Browse to select a location
to save the file.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Export to begin exporting the user data.
8. When the export is complete, click Finish.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
113
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.5.5
Import User Data
User data in comma-delimited format (CSV) can be imported to BioStar. To import
user data,
1. Click User in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Import User. This will open the Importing window.
3. Type a path and filename where the user data is located or click Browse to
select a file.
4. Click Next. The raw data types will be displayed and the User list field will
default to “Not use. Click here to change.”
5. Click the cell to the right of a data sample. This will open the Setup Field
window, which allows you to map the raw data to a user information field in
BioStar.
6. Map the data to a field by selecting a field label from the drop-down list and
then click OK.
Note: Up to four department levels can be displayed in BioStar. In the CSV file,
include department levels in the same cell, separated by slashes (for example,
“Department 1/Department 2/Department 3”), and then map the cell to the
“Department” field in BioStar.
7. Repeat steps 5-6 as necessary to map additional data.
8. When you are finished mapping data to fields, click Next.
9. Click Import.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
114
4. Manage the BioStar System
10. If you map data to fields in an existing user account, you will prompted to
confirm that you wish to overwrite the existing data. Click Yes or Yes to All to
confirm or click No or No to All to deny.
11. Click Finish.
4.6
Manage Time and Attendance
BioStar allows you to monitor the time and attendance status of users and
generate reports of T&A events, which you can edit or export as needed.
4.6.1
Monitor T&A Status via the IO Board
The IO Board displays time and attendance events only for entrance and exit
events performed via the T&A function keys of access control devices. This feature
is available only in the Standard Edition of BioStar.
You can use the board to verify recent T&A activities or to quickly determine
which users are checked in or out. Users can use the board to view their own T&A
activities. To monitor the time and attendance status of users,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. From the task pane, click IO Board. This will open the IO Board window.
3. Click User, a user name, or a department name in the pane on the left. This
will display the corresponding T&A status in the pane on the right.
4. To close the window, click Close.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
115
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.6.2
Generate T&A Reports
You can generate T&A reports to view various time and attendance events for
users. You can also modify and print time and attendance data for other uses,
such as calculating payrolls. To generate a T&A report,
1. Click Time and Attendance in the shortcut pane.
2. In the task pane, click Report. This will open the T&A Report window.
3. Click a radio button to select a report type:
• Daily Report - a report of all activities for the specified date range sorted
by date.
•
Individual Report - a report of activities for the specified date range sorted
by user ID.
•
Result Report - a report of activities that you specify via the drop-down
list.
•
Edit History - a report of edited entries.
•
Daily Summary - a summary of activities for the specified date range
sorted by date.
•
Individual Summary - a summary of activities for the specified date range
sorted by user ID.
4. Select a date range by clicking the drop-down calendars.
5. Click View Report to retrieve and display the results.
Note: Click Upload Log to retrieve data from all networked devices. Click Update Report
to refresh the report with any data you have modified (see section 4.5.3).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
116
4. Manage the BioStar System
You can sort report data by clicking any column header (the sort will toggle
between ascending and descending orders). You can also rearrange the columns
by dragging and dropping column headers in a new location. Furthermore, you
can add or remove columns by using the menu that appears when you right-click
on any column header:
To add a column to the report,
1. Right-click on any column header.
2. Click Column and select a column to add to the report.
To remove a column from the report,
1. Right-click on the column you want to remove.
2. Click Remove column.
4.6.3
Modify T&A Reports
Time and attendance data can be modified for time reporting or payroll purposes.
After generating a T&A report, you can locate cells that you want to modify and
then click the cell and enter a new value or select an option from the drop-down
list. This will save the modification to the report, but it will not overwrite the
original data collected from access control devices. If you want to reproduce the
report with the original data, click the checkbox next to “Rebuild” and then click
Update Report.
To perform detailed modifications on report data,
1. Generate a T&A report as described in 4.5.2.
2. Right-click a cell and click Detailed editing. This will open the Edit Data
window.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
117
4. Manage the BioStar System
3. To edit an event, change the following event properties as necessary and then
click Edit Event. To add an event, change the following event properties as
necessary and then click Add Event. To delete the event, click Delete Event.
• Date - select whether the event occurred on this day or the next day.
•
Event - select the type of event.
•
Time - set the time of the event.
•
Device - set the device where the event occurred.
4. When you are finished modifying the event data, click the “X” in the top right
corner to close the window.
5. In the T&A Report window, ensure that the “Rebuild” checkbox is NOT
checked.
6. Click Update Report. The report will show the changes you have made. The
changes you have made via the detailed editing will not be restored to the
original data even if you click the check box next to “Rebuild” and click
Update Report. If you want to reproduce the report with the original data,
click the checkboxes next to “Rebuild” and “Rebuild All” and then click Update
Report.
Note: You can sort report data by clicking any column header (the sort will toggle between
ascending and descending orders). You can also rearrange the columns by dragging and
dropping column headers in a new location.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
118
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.6.4
Print or Export T&A Report Data
To print or export T&A report data,
1. Generate a T&A report as described in 4.5.2 and make any necessary
modifications as described in 4.5.3.
2. Click View Report. This will open a preview window similar to the one below.
4. To print the report, click the print icon on the toolbar.
5. To export report data, click the export icon on the toolbar and then select an
export format and a destination. You can export data in the following formats:
• Adobe Acrobat (PDF)
•
Crystal Report (RPT)
•
HTML 3.2 or 4.0
•
Microsoft Excel 97-2000 or Microsoft Excel 97-2000–data only (XLS)
•
Microsoft Word or Microsoft Word–editable (RTF)
•
Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
•
Record Style–Columns with spaces (REC)
•
Report Definition (TXT)
•
Rich Text Format (RTF)
•
Comma Separated Values (CSV)
•
Tab Separated Text (TTX)
•
Text (TXT)
•
XML
Note: You can refresh the report data by clicking the refresh icon on the toolbar. You can
also search for text in the report by clicking the search (binoculars) icon on the toolbar.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
119
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.7
Manage Devices
You can easily remove devices, if necessary, and upgrade the device firmware
directly from the BioStar interface. When removing devices, first ensure that any
new data that may have been added at the terminal has been transferred to the
BioStar server.
4.7.1
Remove Devices
If you need to remove a device from the BioStar system, click Device in the
shortcut pane, then right-click the device name and click Remove Device.
4.7.2
Upgrade Device Firmware
On occasion, it is necessary to upgrade your devices to the latest firmware version.
To upgrade device firmware,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Device > Firmware Upgrade. This will
open the Firmware Upgrade window.
2. Click the radio button next to the type of device you want to upgrade.
3. Click Select Device and select a device or devices from the Device Tree
window.
4. Click OK to close the Device Tree window.
5. Click Select Firmware.
6. Locate the firmware file on your computer or network and click Open.
7. Click Upgrade.
8. When the firmware upgrade is complete, wait for the device to restart, and
then click Close.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
120
4. Manage the BioStar System
4.7.3
Downgrade Device Firmware
Devices may not work properly if downgraded or reverted back to an older version
of firmware. Suprema does not recommend a downgrade. If your devices require a
downgrade, please contact Suprema Technical Support (Email:
[email protected]), your Suprema distributor, or a local Suprema dealer.
4.8
Activate Fingerprint Encryption
By default, additional fingerprint encryption is turned off. In most cases,
activating this encryption is unnecessary. However, you may choose to turn on
the encryption to provide extra security or privacy. Keep in mind that activating
fingerprint encryption requires management of encryption keys and should be
performed only by advanced users.
Activating fingerprint encryption will render all previously saved templates
unusable. As a result, it is best to activate the encryption prior to registering
users. To activate fingerprint encryption,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Fingerprint. This will open the
Fingerprint window.
2. Click the checkbox under “Security Option” to activate the fingerprint template
encryption.
3. Click Yes to acknowledge the warning statement.
4. If desired, you may also change the encryption key:
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
121
4. Manage the BioStar System
a. Click Encryption Key. This will open the Change Encryption Key window.
b. Enter a new encryption key in the first field.
c. Confirm the key by entering it in the second field.
d. Click Change.
5. Click Save. The option you have chosen will appear on the Fingerprint tab in
the Device pane.
4.9
Change the Fingerprint Template
BioStar offers three types of fingerprint templates: ISO 19794-2, ANSI378, or
Suprema’s proprietary format. Suprema’s format is active by default. Changing
fingerprint template options will render all previously saved templates unusable.
As a result, it is best to choose a template option prior to registering users. To
change the fingerprint template option,
1. From the menu bar, click Option > Fingerprint. This will open the
Fingerprint window.
2. Click the checkbox under “Use ISO Format Template” to select the ISO format
or “Use ANSI378 Format Template” to select the ANSI format.
3. Click Yes to acknowledge the warning statement.
4. Click Save.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
122
05
Customize Settings
This section describes the settings available in the BioStar software. BioStar provides
precise control and customization of the access control system via settings for device
functions, door and zone behaviors, and user accounts.
5.1
Customize Device Settings
While most device settings are similar for BioStation, BioEntry Plus, BioEntry W,
BioLite Net, Xpass, Xpass Slim, D-Station, and X-Station devices, the devices
provide slightly different capabilities. The sections that follow describe the settings
for each device separately. To access the tabs described below, click Device in the
shortcut pane, then click a device name.
5.1.1
Customize Settings for BioStation Devices
The sections that follow describe the settings available for BioStation devices.
Customize the way BioStation devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
123
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for BioStation devices.
•
BioStation Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
1:1 Operation Mode - the drop-down lists in this area allow you to
control the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can
choose a normal authentication mode for working hours and a more
strict authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You
can specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see
section 5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the
device authentication mode will apply.
- ID/Card + Fingerprint - set the device to require ID or card plus
fingerprint authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
- ID/Card + Password - set the device to require ID or card plus
password authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
- ID/Card + Fingerprint/Password - set the device to require ID or
card plus fingerprint or password authorization (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
124
5. Customize Settings
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
•
- ID/Card + Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require ID or
card plus fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, Disable,
or custom schedule).
Mifare (available only on BioStation Mifare devices)
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Template on Card - check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to view the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
•
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Other options
- 1:N Schedule - set a schedule for using fingerprint only
authentication (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
- 1:N Operation Mode - set a method for activating the fingerprint
sensor (Auto, Ok/Function Key, or None).
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting,
which is located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication
mode will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
- Double Mode - set the device to require authentication of two users’
access cards or fingerprints (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
The timeout for presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
- Fast ID Matching - set the device to allow quicker authentication,
by requiring users to input only the first two digits of the user ID
and scan a single fingerprint (Enable or Disable). This option
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
125
5. Customize Settings
attempts authentication for a smaller subset of users (only those
with the same first two digits in their user IDs) to increase matching
speed.
- Note: This option does not support server matching (see 5.1.1.2). When
using function keys for T&A events (see 5.1.1.8), only keys F1-F4 are
supported (BioStation V1.7 and higher).
- Interphone - set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door (Not Use or
Use).
5.1.1.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization
settings for BioStation devices.
•
Fingerprint
- Security Level - set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
- Image Quality - set the strictness of the quality check for
fingerprint scans (Weak, Normal, or Strict). If a fingerprint image is
below the specified quality level, it will be rejected.
- Sensitivity - set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to
7 [Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily
captured fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to
external noise.
- 1:N Delay - set the delay between scans when identifying
fingerprints (0 sec to 10 sec). This delay prevents the scanner from
processing the same fingerprint more than once if a user has not yet
removed his or her finger from the scanner.
- 1:N Fast Mode - set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
126
5. Customize Settings
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
- View Image - set to show or hide fingerprint images on the
BioStation display (Yes or No).
- Scan Timeout - set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card
ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this
mode is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or
card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when
you have more users than can be downloaded to a device or user
information cannot be distributed due to security concerns.
•
- Check Fake Finger – set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
Check Duplicate FP - set the device to determine whether or not a
scanned fingerprint has been previously enrolled. If the device
determines that a fingerprint has been previously enrolled, the
enrollment process will fail.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
127
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation devices.
•
TCP/IP Setting
- LAN Type - select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
- WLAN - select a preset WLAN configuration from the drop-down list.
This option is active only when WLAN is selected as the TCP/IP
setting.
- Change setting - click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected
as the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring
settings for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.1.
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Max Conn. - specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to enable the server mode.
- Not use - click this radio button do disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
- Server Port - specify the port used to connect to the server.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
128
5. Customize Settings
- SSL - displays the status of SSL for the server connection.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
RS485
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection). For more information about RS485 modes,
see sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
•
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232 - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600 to
115200).
USB Setting - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB
port on the BioStation device.
5.1.1.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for a BioStation device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting - select a default access group to be applied to
new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
129
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the BioStation (or Secure I/O) device for which you will
add or modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.1.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
enter the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
130
5. Customize Settings
•
Schedule - set the schedule during which the inputs will be
monitored (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
•
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.1.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioStation
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
131
5. Customize Settings
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden
only by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.1.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of user IDs and access
cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards that can be registered.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
132
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation display
and event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must
click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings
to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
Display/Sound
- Language - set the language to use on the display (Korean, English,
or Custom).
- Sub Info - set the info to display at the bottom of the BioStation
display (Time, or None).
- Menu Timeout - set the length of time before the display will return
to the idle screen (Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, or 30 sec).
- Private Msg - enable or disable the option to show a private
message on the BioStation display (Disable or Enable). You can add
a private message from the Event tab in the User pane: click Modify
Private Information, set options for display count and display
duration, enter text in the Private Message field, and then click Save.
- Resource - set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a
language resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom
and then click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
133
5. Customize Settings
- Background - set the type of background for the BioStation display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 320x240 pixels each. Only one image at a
time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can be
displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
- Notice - click this button to create a notice that will be shown on
the BioStation display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply
to apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply
the notice to additional devices.
- Volume - set the volume of the BioStation device (10% to 100%).
•
•
- Msg Timeout - set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
Background Image - click this checkbox to upload new background
images. Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
Sound - click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds.
Click an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate
and add a new sound file.
5.1.1.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a
BioStation device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you
must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same
settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
134
5. Customize Settings
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
•
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (F1-F4, 1-9, CALL, 0, or ESC). If you are using
the Event Fix mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to
designate a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.7.1.
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users who activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving
or leaving on time at work even though they actually arrive late or
leave early. If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being
on time on T&A reports but their work time will be calculated
correctly based on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out,
you can enable the “Add work time after this event” option. If this
option is enabled, users activating the appropriate key will be
considered working for the remainder of the time slot even if they
leave the office early.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
135
5. Customize Settings
5.1.1.10 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a
BioStation device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand
Configuration wizard. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand Input - assign the Wiegand input:
- Disabled - the input will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
•
- Wiegand [User] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
Wiegand Output - assign the Wiegand output:
- Disabled - the output will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand [User] - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the
ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
136
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2
Customize Settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W
Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioEntry Plus and BioEntry
W devices. Customize the way BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices function by
changing these settings to suit your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.2.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices.
•
BioEntry Plus Time/BioEntry W Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
Operation Mode - for each of the following options, click the
corresponding checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which
requires verification of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
- All - set the device to allow all types of authorization (Always,
Disable, or custom schedule).
- Card + Fingerprint - set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
- Only Fingerprint - set the device to require only fingerprint
authorization (Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
137
5. Customize Settings
- Only CARD - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s authorization setting (Private
Auth Mode), which is located on the Details tab in the User pane. If
disabled, the authentication mode will be determined by the
operation mode settings of the device.
•
- Double Verification Mode - set the device to require verification
from two users during a selected schedule (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Mifare/iCLASS (available on select models)
- Bio Entry Plus Mifare devices:
- Not use Card - check this box to disable MIFARE card authorization.
- Card Reading Mode - set the tyupe of card authorization mode
(Mifare Template or Mifare CSN only)
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to configure the MIFARE
layout used by the device. For more information about configuring
MIFARE layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Bio Entry Plus iCLASS devices:
- Not use Card - check this box to disable iCLASS or FeliCa card
authorization.
- Card Reading Mode – set the type of card authorization mode
(iCLASS Template, iCLASS CSN only, or FeliCa CSN only).
•
- View Card Layout - click this button to configure the iCLASS layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring iCLASS
layouts, see section 3.6.4.7.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
138
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization
settings for BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices.
•
Fingerprint
- Security Level - set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
- Scan Timeout - set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card
ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this
mode is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or
card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when
you have more users than can be downloaded to a device or user
information cannot be distributed due to security concerns.
- 1:N Fast Mode - set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
- Check Fake Finger – set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
139
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W devices.
•
TCP/IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to use specific server settings.
- Not use - click this radio button to disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
Support 100 Base-T - this option allows you to enable or disable a
fast Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will
detect the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best
connection. If you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to
establish a 10Base-T Ethernet connection.
- Use - click this radio button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
140
5. Customize Settings
•
- Not Use - click this radio button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.2.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups, and T&A mode settings for a BioEntry Plus or
BioEntry W device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting - select a default access group to be
applied to new users who have not been assigned to another access
group.
•
Automatic T&A Mode Change
- T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode for the device
(Disable, Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
141
5. Customize Settings
- Fixed Entrance - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always,
Disable, or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more
information on creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- Fixed Exit Time - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable,
or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- In Event Caption - set a caption for check-in.
- Out Event Caption - set a caption for check-out.
5.1.2.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioEntry Plus or
BioEntry W device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add,
modify, or delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must
specify them from the Input Setting window. For more information about
configuring input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W (or Secure I/O) device
for which you will add or modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.2.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
142
5. Customize Settings
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
enter the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
Schedule - set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.2.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioEntry
Plus or BioEntry W device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to
add, modify, or delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you
must specify them from the Output Setting window. For more information
about configuring output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
143
5. Customize Settings
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.2.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
144
5. Customize Settings
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of user IDs and access
cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards that can be registered.
5.1.2.8
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, see section 3.2.5.1.
•
Card ID - enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command
card on the reader to automatically populate the fields.
•
Command Type - select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card,
Delete Card, or Delete All Card).
5.1.2.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the LED and buzzer
behaviors by event. To save changes to these settings, you must click
Update in the corresponding section for each event.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
145
5. Customize Settings
•
Event - specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down
list.
•
LED - set the LED behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
- Colors - specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
•
Buzzer - set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event.
Enter “0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
- Volume - set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration
(in milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected
volume and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should
remain off before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
- Fade Out - set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
146
5. Customize Settings
5.1.2.10 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device. Click Change Format to launch the
Wiegand Configuration wizard. To activate the Wiegand feature for a
BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device, click the checkbox at the top right of
the tab. For more information on configuring the Wiegand format, see
section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand Input - assign the Wiegand input:
- Disabled - the input will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
•
- Wiegand [User] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
Wiegand Output - assign the Wiegand output:
- Disabled - the output will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand [User] - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the
ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
147
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3
Customize Settings for BioLite Net Devices
The sections that follow describe the settings available for BioLite Net devices.
Customize the way BioLite Net devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.3.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for BioLite Net devices.
•
BioLiteNet Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
Sensor Mode
- Always On - set the device sensor to be always available on standby
(Always or Disable).
- ID Entered - set the device sensor to be available on standby only
after a valid ID is entered (Always or Disable).
•
- OK Pressed - set the device sensor to be available on standby only
after the OK key is pressed (Always or Disable).
Operation Mode - for each of the following options, click the
corresponding checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which
requires verification of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
- Fingerprint Only - set the device to require fingerprint only
authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
148
5. Customize Settings
- Password Only - set the device to require password only
authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
- Fingerprint/Password - set the device to require fingerprint or
password authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
- Fingerprint+Password - set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, Disable, or Custom Schedule).
•
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting,
which is located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication
mode will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Template on Card - check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to configure the MIFARE
layout used by the device. For more information about configuring
MIFARE layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
149
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization
settings for BioLite Net devices.
•
Fingerprint
- Security Level - set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
- Scan Timeout - set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card
ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this
mode is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or
card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when
you have more users than can be downloaded to a device or user
information cannot be distributed due to security concerns.
- 1:N Fast Mode - set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
- Check Fake Finger – set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
150
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioLite Net devices.
•
TCP/IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to use specific server settings.
- Not use - click this radio button to disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
Support 100 Base-T - this option allows you to enable or disable a
fast Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will
detect the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best
connection. If you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to
establish a 10Base-T Ethernet connection.
- Use - click this radio button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
- Not Use - click this radio button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
151
5. Customize Settings
•
RS485
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.3.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for a BioLite Net device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting - select a default access group to be
applied to new users who have not been assigned to another access
group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
152
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioLite Net
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the BioLite Net (or Secure I/O) device for which you
will add or modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.3.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The normal
door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open until an
operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
153
5. Customize Settings
•
•
enter the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioLite Net device.
Schedule - set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.3.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioLite Net
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
154
5. Customize Settings
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.3.7
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
155
5. Customize Settings
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of user IDs and access
cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards that can be registered.
5.1.3.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer
behaviors by event. To save changes to these settings, you must click
Update in the corresponding section for each event. You can also
customize the language used on the device display.
•
Event - specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down
list.
•
LED - set the LED behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
- Colors - specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
•
Buzzer - set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event.
Enter “0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
- Volume - set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
156
5. Customize Settings
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration
(in milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected
volume and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should
remain off before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
- Fade Out - set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
•
Language - set the language to use on the display (Korean, English, or
Custom).
•
Resource File - set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface by clicking the ellipsis (…) button and locating the resource
file.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
157
5. Customize Settings
5.1.3.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a
BioLite Net device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you
must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same
settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
•
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (*1-*15). If you are using the Event Fix mode,
you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- - Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you
can specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.7.1.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
158
5. Customize Settings
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users using the appropriate keys will be regarded arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually come late or leave early.
If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based
on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable
the “Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled,
users using the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even though they leave the office early.
5.1.3.10 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a BioLite
Net device. Unlike BioStation devices, only one Wiegand format can be
configured at a time (either input only or output only). Click Change
Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard. To activate the
Wiegand feature for a BioLite Net device, click the checkbox at the top
right of the tab. For more information on configuring the Wiegand format,
see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will process ID
data from networked devices and RF card readers in the same way
(this is the typical function of previous versions of BioStar). The
Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate independently,
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
159
5. Customize Settings
which allows them to be associated with doors, included in zones, and
leave logs with their own device IDs.
•
Wiegand Input - assign the Wiegand input:
- Disabled - the input will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
•
- Wiegand [User] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
Wiegand Output - assign the Wiegand output:
- Disabled - the output will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand [User] - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the
ID field of the Wiegand string.
5.1.4
Customize Settings for Xpass Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for Xpass devices. Customize
the way Xpass devices function by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.1.4.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for Xpass devices.
•
Xpass Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
160
5. Customize Settings
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
Operation Mode - for each of the following options, click the
corresponding checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which
requires verification of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
•
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform card ID matching
at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is
enabled, the device will send card ID to the server to verify a match.
This mode is useful when you have more users than can be
downloaded to a device or user information cannot be distributed
due to security concerns.
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Data Card - check this box to use the user data on the MIFARE
card for authorization. The user data card does not provide
fingerprint templates.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to view the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
161
5. Customize Settings
5.1.4.2
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
Xpass devices.
•
TCP/IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to use specific server settings.
- Not use - click this radio button to disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
Support 100 Base-T - this option allows you to enable or disable a
fast Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will
detect the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best
connection. If you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to
establish a 10Base-T Ethernet connection.
- Use - click this radio button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
162
5. Customize Settings
•
- Not Use - click this radio button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.4.3
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings,
default access groups, and T&A mode settings for Xpass devices.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting - select a default access group to be
applied to new users who have not been assigned to another access
group.
•
Automatic T&A Mode Change
- T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode for the device
(Disable, Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
163
5. Customize Settings
- Fixed Entrance - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always,
Disable, or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more
information on creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- Fixed Exit Time - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable,
or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- In Event Caption - set a caption for check-in.
- Out Event Caption - set a caption for check-out.
5.1.4.4
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an Xpass device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input
Setting window. For more information about configuring input settings,
see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the Xpass (or Secure I/O) device for which you will add
or modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.4.5).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
164
5. Customize Settings
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
enter the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
Schedule - set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.4.5
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an Xpass
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
165
5. Customize Settings
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
166
5. Customize Settings
5.1.4.6
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, see section 3.2.7.1.
•
Card ID - enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command
card on the reader to automatically populate the fields.
•
Command Type - select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card,
Delete Card, or Delete All Card).
5.1.4.7
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer
behaviors by event. To save changes to these settings, you must click
Update in the corresponding section for each event.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
167
5. Customize Settings
•
Event - specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down
list.
•
LED - set the LED behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
- Colors - specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
•
Buzzer - set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event.
Enter “0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
- Volume - set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration
(in milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected
volume and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should
remain off before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
- Fade Out - set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
168
5. Customize Settings
5.1.4.8
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an Xpass
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard.
To activate the Wiegand feature for an Xpass device, click the checkbox at
the top right of the tab. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand Input - assign the Wiegand input:
- Disabled - the input will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
•
- Wiegand [User] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
Wiegand Output - assign the Wiegand output:
- Disabled - the output will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand [User] - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the
ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
169
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5
Customize Settings for Xpass Slim Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for Xpass Slim devices.
Customize the way Xpass Slim devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.5.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for Xpass Slim devices.
•
Xpass Slim Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
Operation Mode - for each of the following options, click the
corresponding checkbox to enable Double Verification Mode, which
requires verification of two users’ credentials to gain entry to a door.
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, Disable, or custom schedule).
•
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform card ID matching
at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is
enabled, the device will send card ID to the server to verify a match.
This mode is useful when you have more users than can be
downloaded to a device or user information cannot be distributed
due to security concerns.
Mifare: Mifare template cards are not supported in the Xpass slim
device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
170
5. Customize Settings
•
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
5.1.5.2
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
Xpass Slim devices.
•
TCP/IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to use specific server settings.
- Not use - click this radio button to disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
171
5. Customize Settings
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
Support 100 Base-T - this option allows you to enable or disable a
fast Ethernet connection for the device. When enabled, the device will
detect the Ethernet network and automatically establish the best
connection. If you do not enable this option, the device will attempt to
establish a 10Base-T Ethernet connection.
- Use - click this radio button to enable the 100base-T connection for
the device.
•
- Not Use - click this radio button to disable the 100base-T
connection for the device.
RS485
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
Slave, or PC Connection).
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.5.3
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings,
default access groups, and T&A mode settings for Xpass Slim devices.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
172
5. Customize Settings
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Access Group Setting - select a default access group to be
applied to new users who have not been assigned to another access
group.
•
Automatic T&A Mode Change
- T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode for the device
(Disable, Fixed In, Fixed Out, and Auto).
- Fixed Entrance - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow entrance events by selecting a timezone (Always,
Disable, or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more
information on creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- Fixed Exit Time - when the “Auto” T&A mode is selected, specify
when to allow exit events by selecting a timezone (Always, Disable,
or custom timezone) in the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a timezone, see section 3.7.1.
- In Event Caption - set a caption for check-in.
- Out Event Caption - set a caption for check-out.
5.1.5.4
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an Xpass Slim
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the Xpass Slim (or Secure I/O) device for which you
will add or modify settings.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
173
5. Customize Settings
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O or LIFT I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1,
Input 2, Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 1-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.5.5).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
enter the master password for a BioStation device or provide
authentication locally for a BioEntry Plus or BioEntry W device.
Schedule - set the schedule for the input actions (Always, Disable, or
custom schedule).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
174
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.5
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an Xpass
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
175
5. Customize Settings
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on event (activate) can be overridden only by an
alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.5.6
Command Card tab
The Command Card tab allows you to issue command cards. For more
information about command cards, see section 3.2.7.1.
•
Card ID - enter the card ID or click Read Card and place a command
card on the reader to automatically populate the fields.
•
Command Type - select a type of command card to issue (Enroll Card,
Delete Card, or Delete All Card).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
176
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.7
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize LED and buzzer
behaviors by event. To save changes to these settings, you must click
Update in the corresponding section for each event.
•
Event - specify the affected event by selecting it from the drop-down
list.
•
LED - set the LED behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of LED cycles for the specified event. Enter
“0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the LED.
- Colors - specify up to three display colors from the drop-down list.
The LED will cycle through these colors in order, from top to bottom.
Next to each color, enter the duration (in milliseconds) that the LED
should display the selected color and the duration (in milliseconds)
that the LED should remain off before advancing to the next color in
the cycle.
•
Buzzer - set the buzzer behavior for a specified event.
- Count - enter a number of buzzer cycles for the specified event.
Enter “0” to enable an infinite loop or “-1” to disable the buzzer.
- Volume - set up to three tone volumes from the drop-down list (Low,
Middle, or High). The buzzer will cycle through these volumes in
order, from top to bottom. Next to each volume, enter the duration
(in milliseconds) that the buzzer should maintain the selected
volume and the duration (in milliseconds) that the buzzer should
remain off before advancing to the next volume in the cycle.
- Fade Out - set the tone volume to fade out before advancing to the
next volume in the cycle by clicking this checkbox.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
177
5. Customize Settings
5.1.5.8
Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an Xpass
device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand Configuration wizard.
To activate the Wiegand feature for an Xpass device, click the checkbox at
the top right of the tab. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand Input - assign the Wiegand input:
- Disabled - the input will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a card ID.
•
- Wiegand [User] - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted as
a user ID.
Wiegand Output - assign the Wiegand output:
- Disabled - the output will not be used.
- Wiegand [Card] - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user in
the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand [User] - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user in the
ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
178
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6
Customize Settings for D-Station Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for D-Station devices.
Customize the way D-Station devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.6.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for D-Station devices.
•
D-Station Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
1:1 Operation Mode - the drop-down lists in this area allow you to
control the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can
choose a normal authentication mode for working hours and a more
strict authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You
can specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see
section 5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the
device authentication mode will apply.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
179
5. Customize Settings
- ID/Card + Fingerprint - set the device to require ID or card plus
fingerprint authorization (Always, or No Time).
- ID/Card + Password - set the device to require ID or card plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
- ID/Card + Fingerprint/Password - set the device to require ID or
card plus fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, or No Time).
•
- ID/Card + Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require ID or
card plus fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No
Time).
1:N Operation
- 1:N Schedule - set a schedule for using fingerprint only
authentication (Always, or No Time).
- 1:N Operation Mode - set a method for activating the fingerprint
sensor (Auto, Ok/Function Key, or None).
•
Two Sensor Mode
- Fast Mode – The device will provide the quickest authentication.
- Fusion Mode – Authentication is provided by a fusion algorithm
that allowes users to scan either of two registered fingers and
increases the authentication rate for each finger.
•
- Twin Mode – Each sensor works independently to authenticate up
to two users simultaneously.
Detect Face
•
- set the device to capture a face image. Upon successful
authentication, the captured image is stored in the event log and
can be used later for verification purposes.
Face Fusion
•
- set the device to use face fusion for authentication. This setting can
improve authentication rates for some users. This setting can be
used in conjunction with either the Fast Mode or the Fusion Mode
in the Two Sensor Mode setting.
Fusion Time out
- set the device to automatically time out after a specified number of
minutes, if authentication is unsuccessful (1-20).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
180
5. Customize Settings
•
Interphone - set the device to act as an interphone to allow
communication between people on either side of the door (Not Use or
Use).
•
Other options
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting,
which is located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication
mode will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
•
- Double Mode - set the device to require authentication of two users’
access cards or fingerprints (Always, or No Time). The timeout for
presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Template on Card - check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to view the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
ISO Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
181
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization
settings for D-Station devices.
•
Fingerprint
- Security Level - set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
- Image Quality - set the strictness of the quality check for
fingerprint scans (Weak, Normal, or Strict). If a fingerprint image is
below the specified quality level, it will be rejected.
- Sensitivity - set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to
7 [Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily
captured fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to
external noise.
- 1:N Delay - set the delay between scans when identifying
fingerprints (0 sec to 10 sec). This delay prevents the scanner from
processing the same fingerprint more than once if a user has not yet
removed his or her finger from the scanner.
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform fingerprint or card
ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this
mode is enabled, the devices will send the fingerprint template or
card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode is useful when
you have more users than can be downloaded to a device or user
information cannot be distributed due to security concerns.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
182
5. Customize Settings
- 1:N Fast Mode - set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
- View Image - set to show or hide fingerprint images on the
BioStation display (Yes or No).
- Scan Timeout - set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match (0 [Infinite] to 10
sec).
- Check Fake Finger - set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
- Template Option - displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.6.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for
authorization purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the
specified event. Click Add to select an event that will activate the camera.
Click Apply to save your settings.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
183
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
D-Station devices.
•
TCP/IP Setting
- LAN Type - select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
•
- Change setting - click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected
as the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring
settings for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.1.
IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Max Conn. - specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to enable the server mode.
- Not use - click this radio button do disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
- Server Port - specify the port used to connect to the server.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
184
5. Customize Settings
- SSL - displays the status of SSL for the server connection.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
RS485 Network
•
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, see sections
3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
RS485
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600
to 115200).
USB Setting - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB
port on the D-Station device.
5.1.6.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for a D-Station device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting - select a default access group to be applied to
new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
185
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.6
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a D-Station device.
Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or delete input
settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them from the Input
Setting window. For more information about configuring input settings,
see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the D-Station device for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.1.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Schedule - set the schedule during which the inputs will be
monitored (Always or No Time).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
186
5. Customize Settings
•
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.6.7
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a D-Station
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
187
5. Customize Settings
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
•
Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden only
by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.6.8
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of user IDs and access
cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards that can be registered.
5.1.6.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the D-Station display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must
click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings
to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
188
5. Customize Settings
•
Display/Sound
- Menu Timeout - set the length of time before the display will return
to the idle screen.
- Backlight Timeout – set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
- Theme - set a display theme.
- Background - set the type of background for the BioStation display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 320x240 pixels each. Only one image at a
time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can be
displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
- Notice - click this button to create a notice that will be shown on
the BioStation display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply
to apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply
the notice to additional devices.
- Volume - set the volume of the BioStation device (10% to 100%).
•
- Msg Timeout - set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
Background Image - click this checkbox to upload new background
images. Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
- Type - set the type of background for the BioStation display (Logo or
Notice). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, and PNG) cannot
exceed 800x427 pixels for Notices and 800x327 pixels for Logos.
Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
189
5. Customize Settings
•
Sound - click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds.
Click an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate
and add a new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to
remove sound files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.6.10 T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a DStation device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you
must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same
settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
In this mode, each sensor can work independently. You can set an
event for each sensor.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
190
5. Customize Settings
•
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the
Event Fix mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate
a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.6.1.
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users who activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving
or leaving on time at work even though they actually arrive late or
leave early. If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being
on time on T&A reports but their work time will be calculated
correctly based on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out,
you can enable the “Add work time after this event” option. If this
option is enabled, users activating the appropriate key will be
considered working for the remainder of the time slot even if they
leave the office early.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
191
5. Customize Settings
5.1.6.11 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a DStation device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand
Configuration wizard. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand In/Out - assign the Wiegand input or output:
- Wiegand (User) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a user ID.
- Wiegand (Card) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a card ID.
- Wiegand (User) Out - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand (Card) Out - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
192
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7
Customize Settings for X-Station Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for X-Station devices.
Customize the way X-Station devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.7.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for X-Station devices.
•
X-Station Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
1:1 Operation Mode - the drop-down lists in this area allow you to
control the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can
choose a normal authentication mode for working hours and a more
strict authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You
can specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see
section 5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the
device authentication mode will apply.
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization (No
Time, First Shift, or Always).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
193
5. Customize Settings
•
- ID/Card + Password - set the device to require ID or card plus
password authorization (No Time, First Shift, or Always).
Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization method
(Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of the user
will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting, which is located
on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication mode will be
determined by operation mode settings of the device.
•
Double Mode - set the device to require authentication of two users’
access cards or fingerprints (Always, or No Time). The timeout for
presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
•
Server Matching - enable this setting to perform card ID matching at
the BioStar server, instead of the device. When this mode is enabled,
the device will send card ID to the server to verify a match. This mode
is useful when you have more users than can be downloaded to a
device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
•
Auth Timeout - set the length of time before the device will timeout
when trying to identify an ID match (5, 10, 15, 20, or 30 sec).
•
Detect Face - set the device to capture a face image. Upon successful
authentication, the captured image is stored in the event log and can
be used later for verification purposes.
•
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Data Card - check this box to use the template on the MIFARE
card for authorization.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to view the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
194
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.2
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for
authorization purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the
specified event. Click Add to select an event that will activate the camera.
Click Apply to save your settings.
5.1.7.3
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
X-Station devices.
•
TCP/IP Setting
- LAN Type - select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, or Ethernet).
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
195
5. Customize Settings
•
IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Max Conn. - specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to enable the server mode.
- Not use - click this radio button do disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
- Server Port - specify the port used to connect to the server.
•
- Time sync with Server - check this box to synchronize the device
time with the time maintained at the server.
RS485 Network
•
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, see sections
3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
RS485
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
5.1.7.4
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for an X-Station device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
196
5. Customize Settings
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s card or fingerprint
authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting - select a default access group to be applied to
new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.7.5
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for an X-Station
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the X-Station device for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.1.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
197
5. Customize Settings
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Schedule - set the schedule during which the inputs will be
monitored (Always, First Shift, or No Time).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.7.6
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for an X-Station
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
198
5. Customize Settings
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Closed, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #0-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
•
Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden only
by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.7.7
Black List tab
The Black list tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of user IDs and access
cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards that can be registered.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
199
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.8
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the X-Station display and
event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must
click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings
to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
Display/Sound
- Language - set the language to use on the display (Korean, English,
or Custom).
- Menu Timeout - set the length of time before the display will return
to the idle screen.
- Back Light Timeout – set the length of time before the display goes
dim (Infinite, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 sec).
- Theme - set a display theme (Theme 1-3).
- Resource File - set the language resource file to use for the
X-Station interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use
a language resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom
and then click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file.
- Background - set the type of background for the X-Station display
(Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
and PNG) cannot exceed 240x320 pixels each. Only one image at a
time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16 images can be
displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
- Notice - click this button to create a notice that will be shown on
the X-Station display. After creating a notice, you can click Apply to
200
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
apply the notice to the current device or Apply to Others to apply
the notice to additional devices.
- Volume - set the volume of the X-Station device (0% to 100%).
- Msg Timeout - set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
•
•
- Clock Display - set to display the current time on the device (Enable
or Disable).
Background Image - click this checkbox to upload new background
images. Click Add to locate and add a new image file. To delete an
existing image, click the image name and then click Delete.
- Type - set the type of background for the X-Station display (Logo,
Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, and
PNG) cannot exceed 240x320 pixels for Notices and 240x320 pixels
for Logos. Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice.
Sound - click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds.
Click an event from the list and then click Add to locate and add a
new sound file. Click Delete to remove custom sound files or Play to
preview a custom sound file.
5.1.7.9
T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for an XStation device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you
must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same
settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
201
5. Customize Settings
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
•
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (*1-*15). If you are using the Event Fix mode,
you can click the checkbox to the right to designate a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.7.1.
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users using the appropriate keys will be regarded arriving or leaving
on time at work even though they actually come late or leave early.
If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being on time on
T&A reports but their work time will be calculated correctly based
on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out, you can enable
the “Add work time after this event” option. If this option is enabled,
users using the appropriate key will be considered working for the
remainder of the time slot even though they leave the office early.
202
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.7.10 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for an XStation device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand
Configuration wizard. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will process ID
data from networked devices and RF card readers in the same way
(this is the typical function of previous versions of BioStar). The
Extended mode will allow RF card readers to operate independently,
which allows them to be associated with doors, included in zones, and
leave logs with their own device IDs.
•
Wiegand In/Out - assign the function of the Wiegand input or output:
- Wiegand (User) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a user ID.
- Wiegand (Card) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a card ID.
- Wiegand (User) Out - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand (Card) Out - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
203
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8
Customize Settings for BioStation T2 Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for BioStation T2 devices.
Customize the way BioStation T2 devices function by changing these settings to
suit your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.8.1
Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for BioStation T2 devices.
•
BioStation T2 Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
ID Operation Mode - the drop-down lists in this area allow you to
control the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can
choose a normal authentication mode for working hours and a more
strict authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You
can specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see
section 5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the
device authentication mode will apply.
- ID + Fingerprint - set the device to require ID plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
204
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
- ID + Password - set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
- ID + Fingerprint/Password - set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
•
- ID + Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require ID plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Card Operation Mode
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, or No Time).
- Card + Fingerprint - set the device to require card plus fingerprint
authorization (Always, or No Time).
- Card + Password - set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, or No Time).
- Card + Fingerprint/Password - set the device to require card plus
fingerprint or password authorization (Always, or No Time).
•
- Card + Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require card plus
fingerprint plus password authorization (Always, or No Time).
Fingerprint Operation Mode
- Fingerprint - set the device to require only fingerprint authorization
(Always, or No Time).
- Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require fingerprint plus
password authorization (Always, or No Time).
- Func Key + Fingerprint - set the device to require function key
plus fingerprint authorization (Always, or No Time).
•
- Func Key + Fingerprint + Password - set the device to require
function key plus fingerprint plus password authorization (Always,
or No Time).
Other options
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting,
which is located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication
mode will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
- Double Mode - set the device to require authentication of two users’
IDs, access cards or fingerprints (Always, or No Time). The timeout
for presenting the second authentication is 15 seconds.
205
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
- Detect Face - set the device to capture a face image. Upon
successful authentication, the captured image is stored in the event
log.
- Server Matching - enable this setting to perform user ID,
fingerprint or card ID matching at the BioStar server, instead of the
device. When this mode is enabled, the devices will send the user ID,
fingerprint template or card ID to the server to verify a match. This
mode is useful when you have more users than can be downloaded
to a device or user information cannot be distributed due to security
concerns.
•
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Template on Card - check this box to use the template on the
MIFARE card for authorization.
•
- View Mifare Layout - click this button to view the MIFARE layout
used by the device. For more information about configuring MIFARE
layouts, see section 3.6.4.6.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
206
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.2
Fingerprint tab
The Fingerprint tab allows you to customize fingerprint authorization
settings for BioStation T2 devices.
•
Fingerprint
- Security Level - set the security level to use for fingerprint
authorization (Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as
the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false
rejection.
- Sensitivity - set the sensitivity of the fingerprint scanner (0 [Min] to
7 [Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in more easily
captured fingerprint scans, but also increases the sensitivity to
external noise.
- Scan Timeout - set the length of time before the fingerprint scanner
will timeout (1 sec to 20 sec). If a user does not place a finger on the
device within the timeout period, the authorization will fail.
- 1:N Fast Mode - set the device to use Fast Mode to reduce the
amount of time required for matching fingerprints (Auto, Normal,
Fast, or Fastest). Setting Fast Mode to Auto will adjust the matching
speed according to the number of enrolled templates.
- View Image - set to show or hide fingerprint images on the
BioStation T2 display (Yes or No).
- Check Fake Finger - set the device to detect the use of fake
fingerprints, such as those made from silicon or rubber, and prevent
unauthorized access.
207
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
- Template Option - displays the global fingerprint template settings.
For more information about fingerprint templates, see section 4.9.
5.1.8.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for
authorization purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the
specified event. Click Add to select an event that will activate the camera.
Click Apply to save your settings.
5.1.8.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
BioStation T2 devices.
208
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
TCP/IP Setting
- LAN Type - select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
•
- Change setting - click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected
as the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring
settings for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.1.
IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
•
- Max Conn. - specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
Server
- Use - click this radio button to enable the server mode.
- Not use - click this radio button do disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
•
- Server Port - specify the port used to connect to the server.
RS485 Network
•
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, see sections
3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
RS485
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232
•
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600
to 115200).
USB - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB port on the
BioStation T2 device.
USB Memory - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB
memory on the BioStation T2 device.
209
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for a BioStation T2 device.
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s ID, access card, or
fingerprint authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting - select a default access group to be applied to
new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
210
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.6
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to
allow communication between people on either side of the door.
•
Type – select one of the following options:
- Aanlogue Interphone – choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
- IP Interphone – choose this option to enable the VoIP feature. A
telephone is required.
- BioStar Videophone – choose this option to enable the videophone
feature that supports both video and voice calls. The supplied PC
software is required. The BioStar vidoephone works only with the
device firmware version of BioStation T2 V1.1 or later.
When you select IP Interphone in the Type drop-down list, specify the
following settings:
• VoIP Server IP – specify an IP address for the VoIP server.
•
VoIP Phone Number – specify a phone number for the interphone.
•
VoIP Display Name – specify a name to use for communication
through the interphone.
•
VoIP ID – specify a user name to access the VoIP server.
•
VoIP Password – specify a password to access the VoIP server.
•
VoIP Speaker Gain – specify the volume of the speaker.
•
VoIP Mic Gain – specify the volume of the microphone.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
211
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.7
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a BioStation T2
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the BioStation T2 device for which you will add or
modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.1.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process fingerprints or card
inputs. To enable communication again, an administrator must
provide authentication at the device.
Schedule - set the schedule during which the inputs will be
monitored (Always or No Time).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
212
5. Customize Settings
•
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.8.8
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a BioStation
T2 device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
213
5. Customize Settings
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Auth Duress, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted,
Entrance Limited, Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened,
Door Close, Forced Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
•
Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden only
by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
5.1.8.9
Black List tab
The Black List tab allows you to register user IDs or access card numbers
and prevent them from being authenticated with the device.
•
Current Count – indicates the total number of the user IDs and
access cards that have been registered.
•
Reserved – indicates the remaining number of user IDs and access
cards to be registered.
5.1.8.10 Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the BioStation T2 display
and event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must
click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings
to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
214
5. Customize Settings
•
Display/Sound
- Language - set the language to use on the display (Korean, English,
or Custom).
- Menu Timeout - set the length of time before the display will return
to the idle screen.
- Backlight Timeout – set the length of time before the display goes
dim.
- Theme - set a display theme.
- Use Voice – set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
- Resource File – set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, English, Korean, or Custom). To use a
language resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom
and then click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file..
- Background - set the type of background for the BioStation T2
display (Logo, Notice, or Slide Show). Supported file types (JPG, GIF,
BMP, PNG and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels each. Only one
image at a time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16
images can be displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
- Volume - set the volume of the BioStation device (0% to 100%).
- Msg Timeout - set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed.
- Clock Display - set to display the current time on the device (Enable
or Disable).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
215
5. Customize Settings
•
•
Background Image - click this checkbox to upload new background
images. Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
- Type - set the type of background for the BioStation display (Logo or
Notice). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP, PNG and PDF) cannot
exceed 480x800 pixels for Notices and 480x800 pixels for Logos.
Only one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice.
Sound - click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds.
Click an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate
and add a new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to
remove sound files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.8.11 T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a
BioStation T2 device. To save changes to time and attendance settings,
you must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the
same settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
216
5. Customize Settings
•
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the
Event Fix mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate
a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.6.1.
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users who activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving
or leaving on time at work even though they actually arrive late or
leave early. If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being
on time on T&A reports but their work time will be calculated
correctly based on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out,
you can enable the “Add work time after this event” option. If this
option is enabled, users activating the appropriate key will be
considered working for the remainder of the time slot even if they
leave the office early.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
217
5. Customize Settings
5.1.8.12 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a
BioStation T2 device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand
Configuration wizard. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand In/Out - assign the Wiegand input or output:
- Wiegand (User) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a user ID.
- Wiegand (Card) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a card ID.
- Wiegand (User) Out - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand (Card) Out - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
218
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9
Customize Settings for FaceStation Devices
The sections below describe the settings available for FaceStation devices.
Customize the way FaceStation devices function by changing these settings to suit
your particular environment and operational needs.
5.1.9.1 Operation Mode tab
The Operation Mode tab allows you to customize time and various
operation modes settings for FaceStation devices.
•
FaceStation Time
- Date - manually set the device date with a drop-down calendar.
- Time - manually set the device time.
- Sync with Host PC Time - check this box to automatically
synchronize the device time with the time of the host computer.
- Get Time - get the current time displayed by the device.
•
- Set Time - set the time on the device.
ID Operation Mode - the drop-down lists in this area allow you to
control the authentication mode by schedule. For example, you can
choose a normal authentication mode for working hours and a more
strict authentication mode for hours outside the normal schedule. You
can specify authentication modes either by device or by user (see
section 5.4.1). Unless a particular mode is specified for a user, the
device authentication mode will apply.
- ID + Face – set the device to require ID plus face recognition for
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
219
5. Customize Settings
- ID + Password - set the device to require ID plus password
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- ID + Face/Password - set the device to require ID plus face
recognition or password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
•
- ID + Face + Password - set the device to require ID plus face
recognition plus password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
Card Operation Mode
- Card Only - set the device to require only card authorization
(Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Card + Face - set the device to require card plus face recognition for
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Card + Password - set the device to require card plus password
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Card + Face/Password - set the device to require card plus face
recognition or password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
•
- Card + Face + Password - set the device to require card plus face
recognition plus password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
Face Operation Mode
- Face - set the device to require only face recognition for
authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Face + Password - set the device to require face recognition plus
password authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Func Key + Face - set the device to require function key plus face
recognition for authorization (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Func Key + Face + Password - set the device to require function
key plus face recognition plus password authorization (Always, New
Time Zone, or No Time).
- Face + Func Key - set the device to require face recognition plus
function key authorization, and then immediately proceed to T&A
functions (Always, New Time Zone, or No Time).
- Face + Password + Func Key - set the device to require face
recognition plus password plus function key authorization, and then
immediately proceed to T&A functions (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time).
220
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
Other options
- Private Auth - set the device to allow a private authorization
method (Disable or Enable). If enabled, the authentication mode of
the user will be determined by a user’s “Authorization” setting,
which is located on the Details tab. If disabled, the authentication
mode will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
- Double Mode - set the device to require authentication of two users’
IDs, access cards or face recognitions (Always, New Time Zone, or
No Time). The timeout for presenting the second authentication is 15
seconds.
- Detect Face - set the device to capture a face image (Use or Not Use).
Upon successful authentication, the captured image is stored in the
event log.
•
- Matching Timeout - set the length of time before the device will
timeout when trying to identify a fingerprint match within the device
itself or via the server (3, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30 sec).
Mifare
- Not use Mifare - check this box to disable MIFARE card
authorization.
- Use Template on Card – not available with FaceSation devices.
•
- View Mifare Layout - not available with FaceSation devices.
Card ID Format
- Format Type - set the type of pre-processing to occur on card ID
data (Normal or Wiegand). If “Normal” is selected, the card ID data
will processed in its original form. If “Wiegand” is selected, devices
will interpret card ID data according to the Wiegand format settings.
- Byte Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards
and devices by most significant byte (MSB) or least significant byte
(LSB).
- Bit Order - specify whether to swap ID card data between cards and
devices by most significant bit (MSB) or least significant bit (LSB).
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
221
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9.2
Face tab
The Face tab allows you to customize face recognition settings for
FaceStation devices.
•
Face
- Security Level - set the security level to use for face recognition
(Normal, Secure, or Most Secure). Keep in mind that as the security
level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false rejection.
- Enroll Sensitivity - set the sensitivity of the face recognition system
(0 [Min] to 9 [Max]). A higher sensitivity setting will result in easier
face recognition, but also increases the sensitivity to external visual
noise.
5.1.9.3
Camera tab
The Camera tab allows you to control how the camera is used for
authorization purposes. In the Timezone field, select a timezone for the
specified event. Click Add to select an event that will activate the camera.
Click Apply to save your settings.
222
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9.4
Network tab
The Network tab allows you to customize network and server settings for
FaceStation devices.
•
TCP/IP Setting
- LAN Type - select a type of LAN connection from the drop-down list
(Disable, Ethernet, or Wireless LAN).
•
- Port - specify a port to use for the device.
WLAN
•
- Change setting - click to specify settings for a wireless local area
network (WLAN). This option is active only when WLAN is selected
as the TCP/IP setting. For more information about configuring
settings for a WLAN, see section 3.2.4.1.
IP
- Use DHCP - click this radio button to enable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for the device.
- Not Use DHCP - click this radio button to disable the dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) for this device.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the device.
- Subnet - specify a subnet address for the device.
- Gateway - specify a network gateway.
- Max Conn. - specify the maximum number of connections to allow.
223
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
Server
- Use - click this radio button to enable the server mode.
- Not use - click this radio button do disable server settings.
- IP Address - specify an IP address for the BioStar server.
•
- Server Port - specify the port used to connect to the server.
RS485 Network
•
- Mode - set the mode for a device connected via RS485 (Disable, Host,
or Slave). For more information about RS485 modes, see sections
3.2.1 and 3.2.2.
RS485
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS485 (9600
to 115200).
RS232
•
•
- Baudrate - set the baud rate for a device connected via RS232 (9600
to 115200).
USB - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB port on the
FaceStation device.
USB Memory - click the radio buttons to enable or disable the USB
memory on the FaceStation device.
5.1.9.5
Access Control tab
The Access Control tab allows you to customize entrance limit settings
and default access groups for a FaceStation device.
224
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
Entrance Limit Setting
- Timed APB (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that a user will be
unable to regain entry to an area via the device. Once a user has
gained entry, the device will reject the user’s ID, access card, or
fingerprint authorization for the time period specified here.
- Option 1-4 - click the checkbox to enable an entrance limit setting,
and then specify the effective hours for the entrance limit.
•
- Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
Default Group Setting - select a default access group to be applied to
new users who have not been assigned to another access group.
5.1.9.6
Interphone tab
The Interphone tab allows you to set the device to act as an interphone to
allow communication between people on either side of the door.
•
Type – select one of the following options:
- Aanlogue Interphone – choose this option to enable the analogue
interphone.
- IP Interphone – choose this option to enable the VoIP feature. A
telephone is required.
- BioStar Videophone – choose this option to enable the videophone
feature that supports both video and voice calls. The supplied PC
software is required. The BioStar vidoephone works only with the
device firmware version of FaceStation V1.0 or later.
225
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
When you select IP Interphone in the Type drop-down list, specify the
following settings:
• VOIP Server IP – specify an IP address for VOIP server.
•
VoIP Display Name – specify a name to use for communication
through the interphone.
•
VoIP Phone Number – specify a phone number for the interphone.
•
VoIP ID – specify a user name to access the VoIP server.
•
VoIP Password – specify a password to access the VoIP server.
•
Speaker Gain – specify the volume of the speaker.
•
Mic Gain – specify the volume of the microphone.
When you select Videophone in the Type drop-down list, specify the
following settings:
• Mode – specify the videophone purpose (Single or Extension).
•
Door Control – check this option if the videophone is used for door
access.
•
Device Password – enter the videophone device password.
5.1.9.7
Input tab
The input tab lists input settings you have specified for a FaceStation
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete input settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Input Setting window. For more information about configuring
input settings, see section 3.10.3.2.
•
Device - select the FaceStation device for which you will add or
modify settings.
•
Port - select an input port (Input 0, Input 1, or Tamper). For Secure
I/O devices, these settings are available: Input 0, Input 1, Input 2,
Input 3.
•
Switch - click the radio buttons to specify the normal position of the
input switch (N/O - normally open or N/C - normally closed).
226
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
Function - select an action to associate with the input:
- Not Use - the input port will not be monitored.
- Generic Input - the input port will be monitored for a triggering
action (events specified with “Detect Input 0-3” in the Output
settings window—see section 5.1.1.6).
- Emergency Open - open doors controlled by this device. The
normal door open period will be ignored and doors will remain open
until an operator sends a “Close Door” command via the Door/Zone
Monitoring tab (see section 4.4.1).
- Release All Alarms - cancel alarms associated with this device.
- Restart Device - restart the device.
•
•
- Disable Device - disable the device. A disabled device will not
communicate with the BioStar server or process face or card inputs.
To enable communication again, an administrator must provide
authentication at the device.
Schedule - set the schedule during which the inputs will be
monitored (Always or No Time).
Duration (ms) - set the duration (in milliseconds) an input signal
must last to trigger the specified action.
5.1.9.8
Output tab
The Output tab lists output settings you have specified for a FaceStation
device. Buttons at the bottom of the tab allow you to add, modify, or
delete output settings. To add or modify settings, you must specify them
from the Output Setting window. For more information about configuring
output settings, see section 3.10.3.1.
227
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
•
Device Type - select the device type for which you will add or modify
settings.
•
Port - select an output port (Relay 0). For Secure I/O devices, these
settings are available: Relay 0 or Relay 1.
•
Alarm On Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm On Event list. These events will activate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will activate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance Limited,
Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close, Forced
Open Door, Held Open Door, Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
- Signal Setting - select a signal setting that you have previously
configured from the menu bar (Option > Event > Output Port
Setting).
•
- Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, an alarm on (activate) event with a priority of 2 can be
canceled only by an alarm off (deactivate) event with a priority of 1
or 2.
Alarm Off Event - specify settings and click Add to add the event to
the Alarm Off Event list. These events will deactivate an alarm.
- Event - select an event that will deactivate an alarm (Auth Success,
Auth Fail, Anti-passback Fail, Access Not Granted, Entrance Limited,
Admin Auth Success, Tamper On, Door Opened, Door Close, Forced
Open Door, Held Open Door, or Detect Input #1-3).
- Device - select the device to monitor for an alarm event.
•
Priority - set a priority for the event. Only an event with an equal or
higher priority (1 is the highest) can override a previous event. For
example, a priority 2 “alarm on” event (activate) can be overridden only
by an “alarm off” (deactivate) event with a priority of 1 or 2.
228
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9.9
Display/Sound tab
The Display/Sound tab allows you to customize the FaceStation display
and event sounds. To save changes to display or sound settings, you must
click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same settings
to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
Display/Sound
- Language - set the language to use on the display (Korean, English,
or Custom).
- Menu Timeout - set the length of time before the display will return
to the idle screen (Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, or 30 sec).
- Backlight Timeout – set the length of time before the display goes
dim (Infinite, 10 sec, 20 sec, 30 sec, 40 sec, 50 sec, or 60 sec).
- Theme - set a display theme (Theme 1-4)
- Use Voice – set the device to notify you with voice messages (Disable
or Enable).
- Resource File – set the language resource file to use for the BioStar
interface (No Change, Korean, English, or Custom). To use a
language resource file other than English or Korean, select Custom
and then click the ellipsis (…) button to locate the resource file..
- Background - set the type of background for the FaceStation
display (Logo, Notice, Slide Show, or PDF). Supported file types (JPG,
GIF, BMP, PNG and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels each. Only
229
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
one image at a time can be used as a logo or notice, while up to 16
images can be displayed (at a set interval) in a slide show.
- Volume - set the volume of the FaceStation device (0% to 100%).
- Msg Timeout - set the length of time that a failure or confirmation
message will be displayed (0.5-5 sec).
•
•
- Clock Display - set to display the current time on the device (Enable
or Disable).
Background Image - click this checkbox to upload new background
images. Click the plus sign (+) to locate and add a new image file.
- Type - set the type of background for the FaceStation display (Logo,
Notice, Slide Show, or PDF). Supported file types (JPG, GIF, BMP,
PNG and PDF) cannot exceed 480x800 pixels for Notices and
480x800 pixels for Logos. Only one image at a time can be used as a
logo or notice.
Sound - click this checkbox to enable and add custom event sounds.
Click an event from the list and then click the plus sign (+) to locate
and add a new sound file. Click Add to add new sound files, Delete to
remove sound files, or Play to preview a selected sound file.
5.1.9.10 T&A tab
The T&A tab allows you to configure the mode and key settings for a
FaceStation device. To save changes to time and attendance settings, you
must click Apply at the bottom of the tab. You can also apply the same
settings to other devices by clicking Apply to Others.
•
T&A Mode - set the time and attendance mode:
230
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
- Not Use - disable the time and attendance functions for this device.
- Manual - users must press the specified key every time they enter or
leave to record their T&A events.
- Manual Fix - when a T&A key is pressed, the device will remain in
that mode until a different T&A key is pressed.
- Auto change - the device will automatically change T&A modes to
correspond with the functions specified for a time period.
•
- Event Fix - the device will perform only the specified T&A function.
T&A Key - specify which keys to use for T&A events and the event
types associated with them:
- Function Key - select a function key from the drop-down list to
assign a T&A event (F1-F4, EXT01-EXT12). If you are using the
Event Fix mode, you can click the checkbox to the right to designate
a fixed event.
- Event Caption - enter a caption for the event.
- Auto Mode Schedule - when using the Auto Change mode, you can
specify when the event will occur by selecting a timezone in the
drop-down list. For more information on creating a timezone, see
section 3.6.1.
- Event Type - set the type of event to assign to the key (Not Use,
Check In, Check Out, In, or Out). In/Out indicates the general check
in/out events during a day whereas Check In/Out indicates the
formal check in/out events upon arrival and departure at work—or
the first check–in and the last check–out events on that day. When
you choose Check In or Check Out, you can enable the “Regard as
normal check-in/check-out event” option. If this option is enabled,
users who activate the appropriate keys will be regarded as arriving
or leaving on time at work even though they actually arrive late or
leave early. If you enable the “Only Result” option, they appear being
on time on T&A reports but their work time will be calculated
correctly based on their actual check in/out time. If you choose Out,
you can enable the “Add work time after this event” option. If this
option is enabled, users activating the appropriate key will be
considered working for the remainder of the time slot even if they
leave the office early.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
231
5. Customize Settings
5.1.9.11 Wiegand tab
The Wiegand tab allows you to configure the Wiegand format for a
FaceStation device. Click Change Format to launch the Wiegand
Configuration wizard. For more information on configuring the Wiegand
format, see section 3.2.12.
•
Wiegand Mode - set the mode of Wiegand input to use when reading
card ID data (Legacy or Extended). The Legacy mode will treat
connected RF devices as part of their host devices (this is the typical
function of previous versions of BioStar). The Extended mode will
allow RF card readers to operate independently, which allows them to
be associated with doors, included in zones, and leave logs with their
own device IDs.
•
Wiegand In/Out - assign the Wiegand input or output:
- Wiegand (User) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a user ID.
- Wiegand (Card) In - the ID field of the Wiegand string is interpreted
as a card ID.
- Wiegand (User) Out - inserts the user ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
- Wiegand (Card) Out - inserts the card ID of the authenticated user
in the ID field of the Wiegand string.
232
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.2
Customize Door Settings
The sections below describe the settings available for doors that have been added
to the BioStar system. Customize the way these doors function by changing
settings to suit your particular environment and operational needs. To access the
tabs described below, click Doors in the shortcut pane, then click a door name.
5.2.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which devices are used on the inside or
outside of a door, how the devices control the door, and anti-passback features.
When connecting two devices to a single door, the devices should be connected to
each other by RS485. In this case, the I/O ports of only one device can be used.
Specify which device’s I/O ports to use in the “IO Device” drop-down list.
• Inside Device - select a device to use on the inside of the door.
• Outside Device - select a device to use on the outside of the door.
• Unlock Time - select a schedule when the door should normally be unlocked.
During this time, door relays are active.
• Lock Time - select a schedule when the door should normally be locked.
During this time, door relays are inactive.
• IO Device - when using two devices on a single door, specify which device’s IO
ports will be used.
• Door Relay - select a door relay.
• Exit Button - select a device input to use for an exit button (Disable or Input 0
and Input 1 for each device added).
• (Switch Type) - set the normal position of the input used for an exit button
(N/O-normally open or N/C-normally closed).
• Door Status - set an input for a sensor that detects the current status of the
door.
233
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
• (Switch Type) - set the normal position of the input used for a door status
sensor (N/O-normally open or N/C-normally closed).
• Door Open Period (sec) - set the duration (in seconds) that a door relay should
be activated when a door is opened. After this duration, the relay will stop
sending the signal to open the door. The default is three seconds.
• Door Open Alarm (sec) - set the duration (in seconds) that a door can remain
open before an alarm will sound.
• Driven by - select types of events that will trigger associated devices to open
the door.
-
All Events (default) - associated devices will open the door on any
successful authorization events.
-
TNA + AUTH - associated devices will open the door on successful T&A or
credential authorization events or T&A authorization events. To use this
option, you must select the Use Relay checkbox in the T&A tab. This option
is only available for BioStation, BioLite Net, D-Station, X-Station,
BioStation T2, and FaceStation devices. For more information about
configuring T&A settings, see section 5.1.1.9, 5.1.3.8, 5.1.6.10, 5.1.7.9,
5.1.8.11, and 5.1.3.7.
-
AUTH - associated devices will open the door only on successful credential
authorization events.
-
TNA - associated devices will open the door only on successful T&A
authorization events. To use this option, you must select the Use Relay
checkbox in the T&A tab. This option is only available for BioStation,
BioLite Net, D-Station, X-Station, BioStation T2, and FaceStation devices.
For more information about configuring T&A settings, see section 5.1.1.9,
5.1.3.8, 5.1.6.10, 5.1.7.9, 5.1.8.11, and 5.1.3.7.
Disabled - associated devices will not open the door, regardless of the
attempted authorization events.
• Closed by - select an option for closing the door.
-
-
Open period - the BioStar system will close the door after the period
specified in the Door Open Period (sec) field.
-
Open period+Status - the BioStar system will attempt to close the door
based on door status (if you have connected door sensors and the system
can detect that the door is open). If door sensors are not connected or the
system is unable to detect the door status, the system will close the door
after the period specified in the Door Open Period (sec) field. This setting is
useful when used with revolving doors, for example, to prevent someone
from following an authorized person through the door.
234
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
• Anti-passback - click the checkbox to activate the anti-passback feature (only
available when using both an inside and an outside device).
-
Device Name - this field is populated automatically.
-
Device IP - this field is populated automatically.
-
APB Type - set the type of anti-passback restriction to use (Soft or Hard).
-
Reset Time (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that must pass before the
anti-passback status is reset. The default reset time is 0—at this setting,
the anti-passback status will not be reset.
5.2.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions for doors that are forced open
or held open. A forced open alarm occurs when a door is forcibly opened without
any authentication at the device. A held open alarm occurs when a door remains
open longer than the duration specified in the system settings.
• Action
-
Program Sound - activate and select a sound from the drop-down list to be
emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration (“play count”) of
the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0, the specified sound
will play until someone with administrative privileges manually stops the
sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab in the Monitoring pane. To add
custom sounds to the list, see section 3.10.1.2.
-
Device Sound - activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
-
Send Email - activate and setup emails to be sent by the system. For more
information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
-
Output Device - activate and select a device to output an alarm signal.
235
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3
-
Output Port - select an output port to use when sending the alarm signal.
-
Output Signal - select an output signal to send.
Customize Zone Settings
Customize the way zones function by changing the settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs. To access the tabs described below, click
Doors in the shortcut pane, then click a zone name.
5.3.1
Customize Settings for Anti-Passback Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for anti-passback zones.
Customize the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your
particular environment and operational needs.
5.3.1.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which anti-passback type to use for
a zone and the reset period for the anti-passback feature.
•
APB Type - select a type of anti-passback restriction to apply (Soft or
Hard).
•
Reset Time (min) - set the duration (in minutes) that must pass
before the anti-passback status is reset. The default reset time is 0—
at this setting, the anti-passback status will not be reset.
•
In case of Disconnected - set how doors in the zone should behave if
communication is lost between the master and member devices.
236
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.1.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device
for an anti-passback zone.
•
Action
- Program Sound - activate and select a sound from the drop-down
list to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see
section 3.10.1.2.
- Device Sound - activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
- Send Email - activate and setup emails to be sent by the system.
For more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
- Output Device - activate and select a device to output an alarm
signal.
- Output Port - select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
- Output Signal - select an output signal to send.
5.3.1.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can bypass
normal restrictions for the zone. To grant bypass rights to an access
group, select a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
237
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.2
Customize Settings for Entrance Limit Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for entrance limit zones.
Customize the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your
particular environment and operational needs.
5.3.2.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify entrance limits and a schedule for
the zone restrictions.
•
Entrance Limit Zone Setting - click the checkbox to enable an
entrance limit setting, and then specify the effective hours for the
entrance limit.
•
Max Number of Entrance - set the maximum number of entries
allowed during the specified time limit.
•
Timed APB (min) - specify a time limit for re-entry into a zone.
•
In case of Disconnected - set how doors in the zone should behave if
communication is lost between the master and member devices.
238
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.2.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device
for an entrance limit zone.
•
Action
- Program Sound - activate and select a sound from the drop-down
list to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see
section 3.10.1.2.
- Device Sound - activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
- Send Email - activate and setup emails to be sent by the system.
For more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
- Output Device - activate and select a device to output an alarm
signal.
- Output Port - select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
- Output Signal - select an output signal to send.
5.3.2.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can bypass
normal restrictions for the zone. To grant bypass rights to an access
group, select a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
239
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.3
Customize Settings for Alarm Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for alarm zones. Customize the
way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.3.3.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify alarm delays and arm/disarm types
for alarm zones.
•
Delay (sec)
- Arm - set the length of time (in seconds) to delay before arming the
zone.
•
•
- Disarm - set the length of time (in seconds) to delay before
disarming the zone.
Arm/Disarm Type - specify settings for arming or disarming zones.
For more information for configuring arm and disarm settings, see
3.5.2.5. For more information on setting up alarms, see section 3.10.
External Input/Out - specify settings for enabling the BioStar system
to antomatically arming or disarming zones. For more information on
configuring external input/output settings, see 3.5.2.6. For more
information on setting up alarms, see section 3.10.
240
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.3.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device
for an alarm zone.
•
Action
- Program Sound - activate and select a sound from the drop-down
list to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see
section 3.10.1.2.
- Device Sound - activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
- Send Email - activate and setup emails to be sent by the system.
For more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
- Output Device - activate and select a device to output an alarm
signal.
- Output Port - select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
- Output Signal - select an output signal to send.
5.3.3.3
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can arm
and disarm zones. To grant disarm authorization to an access group,
select a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
241
5. Customize Settings
5.3.4
Customize Settings for Fire Alarm Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for fire alarm zones. Customize
the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.3.4.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add or delete devices in the Device List and
inputs to the Input List. To add or delete devices, see section 3.5.2.2.
5.3.4.2
Alarm tab
The Alarm tab allows you to specify alarm actions and an output device
for a fire alarm zone.
•
Action
- Program Sound - activate and select a sound from the drop-down
list to be emitted by the BioStar program. Then, specify the duration
(“play count”) of the sound in seconds. If you set the Play Count to 0,
the specified sound will play until someone with administrative
privileges manually stops the sound via the Realtime Monitoring tab
in the Monitoring pane. To add custom sounds to the list, see
section 3.10.1.2.
242
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
- Device Sound - activate and select a sound to be emitted by devices
connected to the door.
- Send Email - activate and setup emails to be sent by the system.
For more information about sending alert emails, see section 3.10.2.
- Output Device - activate and select a device to output an alarm
signal.
- Output Port - select an output port to use when sending the alarm
signal.
- Output Signal - select an output signal to send.
5.3.5
Customize Settings for Access Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for access zones. These zones
are used to synchronize user data, so the Alarm and Access Group tabs are
unavailable. Customize the way the zone functions by changing these settings to
suit your particular environment and operational needs.
5.3.5.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add devices to the Device List.
•
Synchronize User Info - click this checkbox to automatically
propagate user information to other devices.
•
Synchronize Log Data - click this checkbox to automatically write all
log records to the master device (for member devices in the zone).
•
Synchronize Time - click this checkbox to synchronize the time of
devices in the zone.
243
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.6
Customize Settings for Muster Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for muster zones. These zones
are used to monitors user locations, so the Alarm tab is unavailable. Customize
the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
5.3.6.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to add devices to the Device List.
•
Muster Zone Type - set the type of monitoring to perform (automatic
or manual).
•
Tracking Time (hour) - set the number of hours to monitor the zone.
5.3.6.2
Access Group tab
The Access Group tab allows you to specify access groups that can arm
and disarm zones. To grant disarm authorization to an access group,
select a group and click Apply at the bottom right of the Zone pane.
244
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.3.7
Customize Settings for Interlock Zones
The sections below describe the settings available for interlock zones. Customize
the way the zone functions by changing these settings to suit your particular
environment and operational needs.
Interlock zones works only with the following device firmware versions:
• BioStation V1.9 or later, BioEntry Plus V1.5 or later, BioEntry W V1.0 or later,
BioLite Net V1.3 or later, and Xpass V1.2 or later.
• BioStation T2 and X-Station devices do not support interlock zones.
5.3.7.1
Details tab
The Details tab allows you to specify which doors to use for either side of
the interlock zone. Once added, the door names and device IDs will
appear in the Device List.
•
Door 1 - click the ellipsis (…) button to select door 1 of the interlock
area. Doors without associated devices cannot be added to the
interlock zone.
•
Door 2 - click the ellipsis (…) button to select the device on door 2 of
the interlock area. Doors without associated devices cannot be added
to the interlock zone.
245
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.4
Customize User Settings
Customize various settings for users, including personal details, fingerprint
information, and access card information. To access the tabs described below,
click Users in the shortcut pane, then click a user name.
5.4.1
Details Tab
The Details tab allows you to specify personal information about a user and the
valid dates of a user account. To edit these fields, see section 4.4.3.
• ID - enter an identification number for a user.
• Start Date - set a beginning date that the user can obtain authorization via the
BioStar system.
• Expiry Date - set a date that the user's account will expire (you can also
specify the hour that the account will expire).
• Private Auth Mode - set the authorization method for the user (Device Default,
Fingerprint, Fingerprint + Password, Card Only, Card + Fingerprint, Card +
Password, Card + Fingerprint/Password, Card + Fingerprint + Password, ID +
Fingerprint, ID + Password, ID + Fingerprint/Password, ID + Fingerprint +
Password). If you set the method to “Device Default,” the authentication mode
will be determined by operation mode settings of the device.
• Title - select a title for the user (Guest, President, Director, General Manager,
Chief, Assistant Manager, or custom title).
• Mobile - enter a mobile telephone number for a user.
• Genders - select a user's gender.
• Date of Birth - select a user's date of birth from the drop-down calendar.
246
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.4.2
Fingerprints Tab
The Fingerprints tab allows you to specify which type of scanner to use for
enrollment and the security level to apply. This tab can also be used to test for
fingerprint matches and register duress fingerprints. For more information about
registering fingerprints, see section 3.6.2.
• Enroll Device - select a device to use for scanning fingerprints.
• 1:1 Security Level - select a security level to use for fingerprint authorization
(Device Default and Lowest [1/1,000] to Highest [1/10,000,000]). Keep in mind
that as the security level is increased, so too is the likelihood of a false rejection.
• Duress - set a fingerprint template to be used as a duress finger (the duress
finger will activate alarms when used to gain entry).
5.4.3
Face Tab
The Face tab allows you to specify a FaceStation device to use for storing face
templates of users. When you sucessfully capture a face image, the FaceStation
device transfers 25 face templates to the BioStar. During authentication, any face
template that receives a higher score than one of the registered face templates will
replace the old one. For more information about capturing face images, see
section 3.6.3.
247
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
• Enroll Device - select a device to use for capturing face images.
5.4.4
Face (Fusion) Tab
The Face tab allows you to specify a D-Station device to use for capturing face
images of users. For more information about capturing face images, see section
3.6.3.
•
Enroll Device - select a device to use for capturing face images.
5.4.5
Card Tab
The Card tab allows you to specify card types and IDs and issue cards to users.
For more information about issuing cards, see section 3.6.3.
• Card Type - select a type of access card to issue (Mifare CSN, Mifare Template,
EM 4100, HID Prox, iCLASS CSN, or iCLASS Template).
• Card ID - displays the card ID number when a card is issued.
• Custom ID - enter a custom ID for the card.
248
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
5. Customize Settings
5.4.6
T&A Tab
The T&A tab allows you to specify which shifts, holiday rules, and leave periods
apply to a user. To add new details, click Add at the bottom of the tab. To save
changes to time and attendance settings, you must click Apply at the bottom of
the tab. You can also remove entries by highlighting the entry and clicking Delete.
For more information about configuring time and attendance, see section 3.9.
• Shift Management - specify which shifts apply to the user.
• Holiday Rules Management - specify which holiday rules apply to the user.
• Leave Management - specify leave for the user.
249
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
06
Solve Problems
If you experience problems with the BioStar software, contact Suprema's technical support
by email: [email protected] When composing an email to technical support,
please include the following:
•
Which BioStar version you are using.
•
Which Suprema devices are affected by the problem, if any.
•
The error message you are receiving, if any.
•
A complete (but concise) description of the problem you are experiencing.
•
Your name and title.
•
Your contact information.
•
The best time and method to reach you
250
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
Glossary
access card - A card that can be used to grant or restrict access to a specific area.
BioStar supports MIFARE®, EM4100, HID proximity, iCLASS®, and FeliCa® cards. See
also: proximity card.
access control system - A system of physical mechanisms and controls that permit or
deny access to a particular resource or physical area. BioStar is an IP-based biometric
access control system.
alarm zone - A grouping of devices that is used to protect a physical area. BioStar
monitors input points in an alarm zone and triggers alarms when intrusion or tampering is
detected.
anti-passback - A security protocol that prevents a user from providing unauthorized
entrance to another user via an access card or fingerprint. See also: timed anti-passback.
biometrics - Biometrics refers to the use of physical characteristics for verification or
authorization. BioStar incorporates Suprema’s award-winning fingerprint recognition
technology to provide biometric authentication of a user's identity and authorization to
gain access to restricted areas.
bypass group - A group of users that can bypass normal restrictions for a zone.
client - BioStar client software allows an operator to connect remotely to the BioStar server
and control connected devices. An operator ID and password are required to access the
system via a client.
department - A division of an organization used to group employees. The use of
departments is not necessary, but may be helpful to organize large numbers of
employees.
device - In this guide, the word "device" refers to any Suprema product supported by the
BioStar system. Supported devices include BioStation, BioStation Mifare, BioStation HID,
DStation, BioEntry Plus/BioEntry W, BioEntry Plus Mifare/BioEntry W Mifare, BioEntry
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
251
Glossary
Plus iCLASS, BioEntry Plus HID, BioLite Net, Xpass, and BioMini USB terminals, as well as
the Secure I/O device.
distributed intelligence - In the BioStar system, the authorization database is distributed
to each terminal, so that authorization is faster and can continue even when other parts of
the system are offline.
door - Doors are the physical barriers that provide entry into a building or space. At least
one device must be connected to a door to provide access control, but two devices can be
connected to support anti-passback and other features, such as door relays, alarm relays,
exit switches, and sensors.
duress finger - This term refers to an enrolled fingerprint that will activate silent alerts
when a candidate is under duress. In the typical duress scenario, a perpetrator forces the
candidate to gain access by force or threat of harm. The candidate gains access by means
of his or her "duress finger," which allows access and simultaneously triggers the alarm or
alert actions you specify.
enrollment - The process of creating a user account and capturing images of fingerprints
or issuing access cards.
entrance limit - The maximum number of times a user can gain authorization to a specific
area. The entrance limit can be related to a time period so that users are limited to certain
number of entries during office hours, for example.
ESSID - Extended Service Set ID. The ESSID is the name of a wireless network access
point. It allows one wireless network to be clearly distinguishable from another. ESSID is
one type of SSID (the other being BSSID).
face recognition -The automated process of validating a claimed identity based on the
image of a face. BioStar extracts and analyzes the facial features such as the skin texture
and the shapes of the face, eyes, nose and mouth from a captured face image and
compares them with those of all the registered persons.
false acceptance rate - The false acceptance rate (FAR) is a measure of the likelihood that
a biometric security system will incorrectly accept an access attempt by an unauthorized
user. A system's FAR typically is stated as the ratio of the number of false acceptances to
the number of identification attempts.
false rejection rate - The false rejection rate (FRR) is a measure of the likelihood that a
biometric security system will incorrectly reject an access attempt by an authorized user. A
system's FRR is typically stated as the ratio of the number of false rejections to the number
of identification attempts.
fingerprint recognition -The automated process of matching two human fingerprints: one
previously recorded and one being provided by a user for authentication. BioStar
incorporates Suprema's award-winning algorithms for recognizing fingerprints.
252
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Glossary
fingerprint sensor - A fingerprint sensor is an electronic device used to capture a digital
image of the fingerprint pattern. The captured image is called a live scan. This live scan is
digitally processed to create a biometric template (a collection of extracted features) which
is stored and used for fingerprint recognition.
fire alarm zone - A zone that is used to interface with fire alarms and control doors when
a fire is detected.
host - A host is the device that serves as the master in a RS485 network. The host device
relays data packets between external devices (or a larger network) and slave devices
connected to the RS485 network.
input signal - The signal sent to a device by an external object, such as an exit button.
operator - Operators are personnel who have rights to use BioStar clients. BioStar
includes three pre-defined classes for operators: administrators, operators, and managers.
BioStar also supports a maximum of 16 custom operator classes.
output signal - The signal sent to an external device, such as an alarm siren or electronic
door strike.
proximity card - Proximity cards (or "prox" cards) are contactless integrated circuit devices
used for security access. BioStation, BioEntry Plus, and BioLite Net devices support
EM4100 cards; BioStation Mifare, BioEntry Plus Mifare, BioEntry W Mifare and BioLite Net,
and DStation devices support MIFARE and iCLASS cards; and BioStation HID and
BioEntry Plus HID devices support HID proximity cards.
RF device - Short-range radio frequency devices used to gain access to doors. The BioStar
system allows 3rd party RF devices to be added to the system to incorporate existing
hardware into the access control configuration
security level - see: false acceptance rate.
time and attendance (T&A) - This designation refers to the processes and functions that
monitor and report check-in and check-out activities by employees and allow
administrators to define time slots and schedules. The information collected by the BioStar
system can be used in conjunction with external systems for time reporting and payroll
capabilities.
timed anti-passback - A security protocol that prevents reauthorization of a user for a
specified period of time. See also: anti-passback.
timezone - A customizable schedule that can be used to allow or restrict access during
specified hours. Timezones can combined with doors to create access groups.
user - A user is any person who has access rights. A user's access rights are comprised of
individual rights (user level), membership in access groups, and time restrictions.
253
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Glossary
Wiegand interface - The Wiegand interface is a wiring standard used to connect a card
swipe mechanism to the rest of an electronic entry system. The interface uses three wires,
one of which is a common ground and two of which are data transmission wires usually
called DATA0 and DATA1, but sometimes also labeled Data High and Data Low.
zone - A zone consists of two or more devices that are grouped together. BioStar includes
seven types of zone classifications.
254
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
A
B
access cards
issuing, 64
Access Control tab
BioEntry Plus, 141
BioEntry W, 141
BioLite Net, 152
BioStation, 129
BioStation T2, 210
D-Station, 185
FaceStation, 224
Xpass, 163
Xpass Slim, 172
X-Station, 196
access groups
adding, 76
adding users, 77
assigning to users, 77
selecting, 58
transferring to devices, 78
access zone
Details tab, 243
administrative account
adding, 22
changing level or password, 22
alarm zone
Access Group tab, 241
Alarm tab, 241
Details tab, 240
alarms
activation events, 131, 187, 198,
213, 228
adding custom sounds, 88
configuring actions, 54
configuring settings and sounds, 87
customizing actions, 87
deactivation events, 132, 188, 199,
214, 228
priority, 132, 188, 199, 214, 228
releasing, 107
anti-passback zone
Access Group tab, 237
Alarm tab, 237
Details tab, 236
BioEntry Plus
configuring, 31
overview, 2
BioEntry W
overview, 2
BioLite Net
configuring, 34
overview, 2
BioMini
overview, 3
BioMini Plus
overview, 3
BioStar Server
configuring, 14
BioStation
configuring, 29
connecting via wireless LAN, 30
overview, 2
BioStation T2
configuring, 39, 41
Black list tab
BioEntry Plus, 144
BioEntry Plus W, 144
BioStation, 132, 155
D-Station, 188
X-Station, 199
Black list tab
BioStation T2, 214
C
Camera tab
X-Station, 195
Camera tab
D-Station, 183
Camera tab
BioStation T2, 208
Camera tab
FaceStation, 222
card ID format, 138, 161, 171
client list, 15
Command Card tab
255
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
BioEntry Plus, 145
BioEntry W, 145
Xpass, 167
Xpass Slim, 176
command cards
deleting all users, 111
deleting an individual user, 110
enrolling users, 62
issuing, 33, 36
connection type, 25
D
databases
creating, 13
mapping imported data, 114
migrating from BioAdmin, 19
Device pane, 32, 34, 35
devices
adding, 25
adding RF devices, 28
adding slave devices, 27
creating a direct connection, 26
creating a server connection, 26
customizing BioEntry Plus settings,
137
customizing BioEntry W settings,
137
customizing BioLite Net settings,
148
customizing BioStation settings,
123
customizing BioStation T2 settings,
204
customizing D-Station settings, 179
customizing FaceStation settings,
219
customizing Xpass settings, 160
customizing Xpass Slim settings,
170
customizing X-Station settings, 193
DHCP, 26
downgrading, 121
locking or unlocking, 108
removing, 120
resetting locks, 109
setting automatic locking, 108
static IP, 26
upgrading firmware, 120
Display/Sound tab
BioLite Net, 156
BioStation T2, 214
D-Station, 188
FaceStation, 229
X-Station, 200
Display/Sound tab
BioEntry Plus, 145
BioEntry W, 145
BioStation, 133
Display/Sound tab
Xpass, 167
Display/Sound tab
Xpass Slim, 177
doors
adding, 46
Alarm tab, 235
associating with devices, 46
configuring, 47
creating door groups, 47
Details tab, 233
opening and closing, 107
Double Mode, 125, 181, 194, 205, 221
D-Station
configuring, 37
overview, 2
E
EM4100 cards, 65
email notifications, 88
entrance limit setting, 129, 185, 196,
210, 211, 225
entrance limit zone
Access Group tab, 239
Alarm tab, 239
Details tab, 238
event logs
viewing from the monitoring pane,
102, 103
event views
changing, 19
events
real-time monitoring, 97
uploading logs to BioStar, 101
viewing logs, 100
viewing logs in panes, 101
256
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
external devices
configuring inputs, 91
configuring outputs, 89
F
face image
capture, 63
FaceStation
overview, 2
FeliCa cards, 64
Fingerprint tab
BioEntry Plus, 139
BioEntry W, 139
BioLite Net, 150
BioStation, 126
BioStation T2, 207
D-Station, 182
FaceStation, 222
fingerprints
activating encryption, 121
changing template, 122
image quality, 126, 182
registering, 61, 62
security level, 126, 182, 207, 222
sensitivity, 126, 182, 207, 222
sensor placement, 60
server matching, 127, 139, 150,
182
fire alarm zone
Alarm tab, 242
Details tab, 242
H
HID proximity cards, 66
holiday schedules, 75
host device
adding, 27
I
iClass CSN cards, 67
iClass layout
editing, 71
Input tab
BioEntry Plus, 142
BioEntry W, 142
BioLite Net, 153
BioStation, 130
BioStation T2, 212
D-Station, 186
FaceStation, 226
Xpass, 164
Xpass Slim, 173
X-Station, 197
installation
BioStar Client, 15
BioStar Express, 11
BioStar server, 12
interlock zone
Details tab, 245
Interphone tab
BioStation T2, 211
FaceStation, 225
L
Lift I/O
overview, 3
lifts
adding, 48
adding users, 49
associating with devices, 48
configuring, 49
setup, 48
logging in to BioStar, 16
M
MIFARE CSN cards, 67
MIFARE layout
editing, 69
MIFARE template cards, 68
monitoring, 97
muster zone
Access Group tab, 244
Details tab, 244
roll call, 99
N
Network tab
BioEntry Plus, 140
BioEntry W, 140
BioLite Net, 151
257
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
BioStation, 128
BioStation T2, 208
D-Station, 184
FaceStation, 223
Xpass, 162
Xpass Slim, 171
X-Station, 195
networking
RS232 settings, 129, 185, 209, 224
RS485 settings, 129, 185, 196, 209,
224
server settings, 128, 184, 196, 209,
224
TCP/IP settings, 128, 184, 195, 196,
209, 223
USB settings, 129
O
operation mode
1 to 1, 124, 179, 193
1 to N, 125, 126, 180
server matching, 161, 170, 194
Operation mode tab
X-Station, 193
Operation Mode tab
BioEntry Plus, 137
BioEntry W, 137
BioLite Net, 148
BioStation, 124
BioStation T2, 204
D-Station, 179
FaceStation T2, 219
Xpass, 160
Xpass Slim, 170
Output tab
BioEntry Plus, 143
BioEntry W, 143
BioLite Net, 154
BioStation, 131
BioStation T2, 213
D-Station, 187
FaceStation, 227
Xpass, 165
Xpass Slim, 175
X-Station, 198
S
Secure I/O
overview, 3
Server Settings, 128, 184, 196, 209,
224
site keys
changing, 69
support, 250
system requirements, 10
T
T&A mode
BioEntry Plus, 141
BioLite Net, 158
BioStation, 134
D-Station, 190, 216, 230
Xpass, 163, 173
X-Station, 202
T&A tab
BioLite Net, 158
BioStation, 134
BioStation T2, 216
D-Station, 190
FaceStation, 230
X-Station, 201
time and attendance
adding a daily schedule, 80
adding a holiday rule, 85
adding a leave period, 86
adding a shift, 82
adding a time category, 79
generating T&A reports, 116
modifying T&A reports, 117
monitoring T&A status via the IO
Board, 115
overview, 8
printing or exporting T&A report
data, 119
Timezone pane, 74
timezones
adding holidays, 75
creating, 74
toolbar, 18
258
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Index
U
users
adding new information fields, 110,
111, 112
Card tab, 248
creating accounts, 58
customizing information fields, 112
deleting, 110
deleting all via command cards, 111
deleting an individual via command
cards, 110
Details tab, 246
enrolling via command cards, 62
exporting data, 113
Face tab, 247, 248
Fingerprints tab, 247
importing data, 114
modifying information fields, 113
registering fingerprints, 60
retrieving data from device, 73
synchronize all, 73
T&A tab, 249
transfer to device, 72
transferring to other departments,
111
D-Station, 192
Wiegand tab
BioEntry Plus, 147
BioEntry W, 147
BioLite Net, 159
BioStation, 136
Xpass, 169
Xpass Slim, 178
Wiegand tab
X-Station, 203
Wiegand tab
BioStation T2, 218
Wiegand tab
FaceStation, 232
X
Xpass
configuring, 35
overview, 3
Xpass Slim
overview, 3
X-Station
configuring, 38
overview, 3
V
Z
visual map
creating, 104
monitoring doors, 105
zones
adding, 52
adding devices, 53
bypassing restrictions, 58
configuring alarm actions, 54
configuring arm and disarm
settings, 55
configuring external input/output
settings, 56
configuring inputs, 54
types, 51
viewing events, 58
W
Wiegand format
26-bit, 43
custom, 44
pass-through, 44
Wiegand mode, 136, 192, 218, 232
Wiegand tab
259
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Suprema Inc.
16F Parkview Office Tower, Jeongja, Bundang, Seongnam, Gyeonggi, 463-863 Korea
Tel: +82-31-783-4502
Fax: +82-31-783-4503
Email: [email protected]
Homepage: www.supremainc.com
260
Copyright © 2011, Suprema Inc. On the web: www.supremainc.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement